Home

to select - Studio 22

1. 28 O Door When you are using buttons and or terminals behind the door press the bottom of the door to open it When not using buttons and or terminals behind the door close it Be careful not to catch your fingers when closing the door QUICK SELECT buttons 101 MASTER VOLUME control knob 85 Q AUDYSSEY DYNAMIC VOLUME indicator 92 AUDYSSEY DSX indicator 93 Master volume indicator D Display B Remote control sensor 3 D SOURCE SELECT knob 31 B SOURCE 31 D TUNING PRESET button 70 72 75 ZONE 2 3 4 REC SELECT button 98 106 D VIDEO SELECT button 60 With the door open URE MIS DIRECT STEREC RESTORER DSX SURROUND MODE _ MODE STANDARD SIMULATION USB iPod DIRECT DMI 6 STATUS oo B Headphones jack 85 connector 17 D ZONE2 ON OFF button 106 USB iPod DIRECT port 24 D ZONE3 ON OFF button 106 STATUS button 96 ZONE4 ON OFF button 106 D DSX button
2. BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON ENTER TUNING PRESET gt AV lt D Be TU SAT TU 4 SS a E SEARCH pem aro 82 AV4b ENTER 2 0 9 GE E gt DTU SAT TU 74 SHIFT O E Sub remote control unit So DTU A G SEARCH SOURCE SELECT MAIN mode CHANNEL MAIN mode 0 9 Searching Categories 1 Press lt gt Channel category 2 Use X gt to select the category to use A V to select the desired channel Accessing SIRIUS Satellite Radio Channels Directly 1 Press SEARCH 2 X f no button is pressed within several seconds the channel automatically switches to the one whose number has been input Press ENTER to set that channel Reception switches to the selected channel Press 0 9 to input the channel Example Accessing channel SR123 Press 1 2 and 3 e UPDATING is displayed while the encording code is being updated e SIRIUS UPDATING is displayed when updating SIRIUS tuner firmware e Refer to Troubleshooting SIRIUS Satellite Radio 857 page 133 regarding other messages Parental Lock 1 Tune to the channel you want to lock Press ENTER for at least 3 seconds Enter Lock Code is displayed Enter the 4 digit lock code using AV 1 gt When yo
3. Resetting the Settings Other Information Troubleshooting Restoring All the Settings to as They were at the Time of Purchase Resetting the Specifications List of preset codes Getting Started Flow of Operations Through Playback Perform the operations leading to playback on the AVR 4810CI in the order shown below Connections Installing Setting the Speakers IG page 11 Speaker Connections 257 page 14 Connecting Devices IG page 17 Turning the Power On 1257 page 28 Settings U t L 1 1 Manual Setup 1257 page 39 X Perform Manual Setup as necessary V Source Select 1257 page 57 Playback Playing Components 1257 page 66 Selecting the Surround Mode i page 87 Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality I page 90 Cautions on Handling e Before turning the power switch on Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are no problems with the connection cables Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is set to the standby mode When traveling or leaving home for long periods of time be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet About condensation If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of the unit and the surroundings condensation dew ma
4. 93 MENU button eeren 30 amp JRESTORER button 94 Cursor buttons VD 30 2DIRECT STEREO button 88 89 ENTER button eee cence 30 PURE DIRECT button 89 D RETURN button eee eee ereere 30 DSP SIMULATION 88 9 V AUX INPUT connectors 24 STANDARD button mmm 87 SETUP MIC jack 33 Part Names and Functions Display ocn DIG ANA CFE 1 Input signal indicators Input signal channel indicators These light when digital signals are input When playing HD Audio sources the indicator lights when an extension channel a channel other than the front center surround surround back or LFE channel is input If there are two or more extension channels the and indicators light Information display The input source name surround mode setting values and other information are displayed here O Output signal channel indicators Monitor output indicators These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting I amp page 43 Monitor Out When set to Auto Dual the indicators light according to the connection status HD Neo 6 96 24 OO TrueHD SMASTERExpress ES 000 T PL I x 3 DSD TUNED AUTO 1 gt PARTY indicators These in
5. Button only on the main unit BUTTON GUI GUI are pas isplay during h utton only on the remote control unit BUTTON men emote control Display Setting contents menu emote control Display Setting contents display display unit operation unit operation AVP ALL Repeat all songs Enable random playback One Repeat the current song Disable random playback OFF Disable repeat playback X GUI menu Random S page 63 can be set in the same way lt X GUI menu Repeat IGS page 62 63 can be set in the same way te 9 EN al The random mode applies when playing tracks on the USB memory The repeat mode applies when playing tracks the USB memory device and on the media server STANDARD Searching Pages Selecting Tracks Press SEARCH then press 1 previous page or gt next page To cancel press A or SEARCH device and on the media server During playback either press A previous track or V RANDOM next track m REPEAT Shuffling Playback Searching by First Letter This operation is convenient for choosing items from the menu screens STANDARD a SEARCH Press RANDOM for Internet radio stations or files stored on the computer ps GUI menu GUI AV lt gt display during When the menu screen is displayed press SEARCH menu Display Settin
6. Bend in the reverse direction a With the antenna on top of any stable surface b With the antenna attached to a wall Installation hole Mount on wall etc Connection of AM antennas 1 Push the lever 2 Insert the conductor 3 Return the lever e Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously e Even if an external AM antenna is used do not disconnect the AM loop antenna e Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel Connecting Devices Connections to Other Devices Components Equipped with a DENON LINK Connector Multichannel playback is possible including DVD Audio and Super Audio CD I page 98 Playing Super Audio CD In addition refer to page 97 Playing a Blu ray Disc Player Compatible with DENON LINK Ath for information on connecting a player that supports DENON LINK Ath edition Blu ray Disc player DVD player AUDIO DENON LINK 6 Hud a Ee EJ e 2 SAT CBL 3 6D AA 5V IA ETHERNET 6 DIGITAL pes dO Pe 27000 7 E vPR R Y 600 2000 s LN WLAN ANTENNA DTU ANTENNA HD Radio FM AM COAX 75Q Ej LOOP o ANT AC OUTLETS ZONE3 cy I 120V 60Hz SWITCHED TOTAL 120W 1A MAX FRONT CENTER SURROUND S BACK FHEIGHT FWIDE ZONE2 ZONES SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 169 Set as Nec
7. i RI Eins 86 Searching ibus pio titii dU priui 86 Searching by First RR ene picis 86 Selecting the Surround Mode Surround Mode e 97 Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality Audio Video AdjUst trt eine ertet ntt itn tuc 90 Adjusting the Sound Audio AdjUSt nnns 90 Adjusting the Picture Quality Picture Adjust 95 Other Operations 97 Playing a Blu ray Disc Player Compatible with DENON LINK 97 Playing Super 98 Recording on an External Device REC OUT mode 98 Convenient Functions rn mr aen n nnn 99 HDMI Control FUNCION essei nic ica eio icone ce aen cca rnc a 99 Setting the Power to Standby After a Certain Amount of Time Sleep Timer Function PIE 100 Adjust the Volume of the Speakers 100 Saving Frequently Used Settings Quick Select Function 101 Playing the Same Network Audio on Different Devices Connected in a Network Party Mode Function 101 Operating a Wireless LAN Compatible Mobile Terminal to Play usc and Still EIL es secede ad racc dod ded nies 102 Operating the AVR 4810CI with a Browser Web Control Function TNT TECUM 103 Various Memory FUNCTIONS sese Rp 104 Playing in ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 Multi zone Function Audio Output Torr ee
8. 105 Video Output ee er 105 Playback 106 Menu Operation M 107 Quick Select Function ccc ccc etter eee ene een eee nant ene 107 Sleep Timer Function o ene tte e katie eee eio iia 107 e o e Q Operating the Connected Devices by Remote Control Unit Operating the Main Remote Control Unit eesse Operating AV Equipment E E E T Presetting A dTER Operating Preset Components rr PTT Setting the Remote ead Cid quc bocas Learning Vite ot ee ee rere MACRO P nectlol a a iral RC Ea pau seus one Punch Through T Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit Adjusting the Backlight s Brightness mme Specifying the Zone Used with the Main Remote Control Unit Resetting the Main Remote Control Operating the Sub Remote Control Unit Switching ZONES ora unes pco EU QE ORE Gana Switching the Multi zone Input Source to the Same Input Source as Used in the MAIN ZONE Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used ZONE SELECT LOCK Setting the
9. s u 1201 E SWITCHED TOTAL 120W 1A MAX E u u E u E u E u E E 4 m A S A A vua X57 SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 7 8 RS 232C 26 1 28 COMPONENT VIDEO connectors 18 20 REMOTE CONTROL jacks 26 HD Radio antenna terminals 23 HDMI 17 Analog audio connectors 18 21 Q WLAN ANTENNA terminal 27 VIDEO S VIDEO connectors 18 21 TRIGGER OUT jacks 26 QQETHERNET connector 26 OSIRIUS connector eee 22 DOCK CONTROL jack 19 BUSB iPod DIRECT 24 FM AM antenna terminals 22 SIGNAL GND 19 XM 21 DPRE OUT connectors 25 105 Speaker terminals 14 16 QQ Digital audio connectors 18 24 BEXT INconnectors sem 25 OD AC inlet 28 DENON LINK connector 23 Part Names and Functions Remote Control Unit 1 Operations Possible by Main Remote Control Unit Operations the AVR 4810CI Main Remote Control Unit RC
10. 6 AN 5 5 A S ARR LI nu Hn nd n d B J M Bid Hu E OO Cp 09 amp OX ROOM TO ROOM DC 12V 150mA MAX DS TIS DIM d Ir FI x as dB a ma x SPEAKERS OQ PHONO cD SIGNAL NO AUDIO IGNA LE Set as Necessary When connecting digital of the SiriusConnect Home Tuner perform the setting Digital Input Assign I page 59 22 Area 2 Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or northeast either through a window or outside Area 3 Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or northwest southwest either through a window or outside Area 5 Put the antenna outside and point it straight up The antenna cannot be used indoors AM outdoor Ground antenna HD Radio Receiver HD Radio broadcasting currentry is available in the United States and select other countries AM loop antenna for HD Radio broadcasting supplied e To prevent interference install at least 3 3 feet 1 m away from the antenna connected to the AVR A4810CI s other AM tuner terminal Direction of broadcasting station FM antenna I 75 O ohms Coaxial cable FM indoor antenna dipole for HD Radio broadcasting supplied 20V 60Hz OTAL 1208 1A MAX SURROUND S BACK ZONE2 ZONE3 6 169 AM outdoor Ground antenna 1 AM loop antenna assembly Remove the vinyl tie and take out the connection line
11. Suoneay O gt T 7 Speaker Connections The AVR 4810CI be connected maximum of three subwoofers The same signal is output from each subwoofer terminal Front Center Surround Subwoofer speakers speaker speakers 1st unit iets 07 m LA v MOO DOOOG DG E E dh 2 DP j M UDIO DVD HDP 90 STRAIGHT o CABLE ANTENNA 759 For the ENEWS speaker terminals the output channels are different depending on the Amp Assign setting Set Amp Assign to suit the speaker system being used and connect the speakers referring to the following chart 14 Subwoofer with built in amplifier USB iPod DIRECT 0000 10 SELECTABLE f Rep penat D 2 SAT CBL 3 CD Deyo ERTA 5 amp EISI IE pl LI e Rs Try Pom pm B p m4 SW 2 S 4 rz WIA zs E 5 Bu 5 B Bu Ms HX Q 7 Q S vi Q Q 7 QV 7 Q 7 Q wi Crus aS lmezus uus uis TID TI po Ded Y ism S SIR S cR ism 65 RAN E Xi 2 X N A K S E m KL xu t B A a B F B AIA a B a B 9 L a a m J O LI IJ tS 11 E o is FR YH 9S E lt joan 5 2 n
12. LN Tm JO yoe J JO 3 CD WR MONITORY pooooo TF How M m am Ih MONITOR Y Pr Cr m 190 ES POOR LS VIDEO ASSIGNABLE DVD 2 SAUCBL 3 0 pr y 9 9 ici Y Iu EH C EXT IN 296 AUDIO DVD HDP SAT CBL VCR Pod DVR TUNER FM SATTU1 SIRIUS 4 RS 232C ANTENNA 738 lt gt d eum VETE Y DOCK CONTROL itp 2 ER o 4 8 STRAIGHT AA lt CABLE TO 9 TS VCR __ PR OR Y Pa CB Pr CR 29 29999006 AUDIO DVD HDP TV SAT CBL VCR Pod DVR SATTU 1 fo 9 SIRIUS RS 232C ANTENNA 5 2 Word 4 our DOCK CONTROL e IL ur STRAIGHT i CABLE TO TS 0000 n v te sw SR A 8 9 SIGNAL RONT CENTER G SURROUND G SBACK FHEIGHT FWIDE 8 G3 FHEIGHT F WIDE ZONE2 GND Keep the power cord unplugged until the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock connection have been completed SPEAKERS PHONO AUDIO Set as Necessary Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is assigned Set as Necessary Input Assign IZ page 58 SIRIUS XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc
13. Yi 5 LL ox P Oe er I E EU STRAIaHI 2 J XR J X cate 27 ROOM To Room oc TA toma wax F TS AD 2p OQ Set as Necessary Oe GND e The AVR 4810CI is compatible with record players with an MM Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is cartridge When you connect to a record player with an MC LR cea I page 58 cartridge use a commercially available MC head amp or a step up transformer e When you increase the volume without connecting the record player Set as Necessary there may be booming noise from the speakers Set other than when iPod is assigned to the VCR iPod terminal Input Assign iPod dock 1257 page 60 The SIGNAL GND terminal of the AVR 4810CI is not a safety ground connection Connect it to reduce noise when noise is excessive e With the default settings the iPod can be used connected to the Note that depending on the record player connecting the ground line VCR iPod connector may have the reverse effect of increasing noise In this case it is not e You can also connect the iPod you are using directly to the USB port necessary to connect the ground line of the AVR 4810CI I page 24 USB Port 19 O gt T 7 Connecting Devices Connecting the Recording Components Digital Video Recorder e Select the terminal to use and connect the
14. um ex 9 POWER OFF AV 42 gt SOURCE SELECT MAIN mode za iPod MAIN mode Important Information Before starting playback make the connections between the different components and the settings on the receiver e Alsorefer to the operating instructions of the connected components when playing them e External devices can be controlled by remote control unit I page 108 Operating the Connected Devices by Remote Control Unit Playing Components Playing a Blu ray Disc Player DVD Player e The following describes the procedure for playing Blu ray disc player DVD player Use the same procedure to play other components e Switch the main remote control unit to the MAIN mode when performing this operation 85 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit 1 Playback preparation D Turn on the power of the TV subwoofer and player 2 Switch the TV s input to the AVR 4810CI 3 Load the disc in the player Turn the AVR 4810CI power on IG page 28 Turning the Power On 3 Press SOURCE SELECT and select the input source Display the source select menu IG page 31 Play the component connected to the AVR 4810CI Make the necessary settings on the player language setting subtitles setting etc beforehand 5 Adjust the items below 1 Adjusting the master volume t amp page 85 J Selecting the surround mode iz page 87 J Adjusting the Sound and Pictur
15. OTE DTE 6 Press ENTER to enter the setting Select 31901 uu Change HDMI input connector assignment 3 Select Input Assign then press ENTER or D Default button 4 Digital audio input The INPUT ASSIGN screen is displayed 2 Input Source 5 Component video input HDMI input iPod dock INPUT ASSIGN Ine Default HDMI DIGITAL COMP iPod DVD HDMII 60778 1 RCA None HDMI2 None 2 RCA None None SAT CBL HDMI3 COAX2 None None VCR iPod HDMI4 Assign HDMI5 3 RCA None HDMI6 None None Select Return Change HDMI input connector assignment 58 Setting items HDMI Set this to change the HDMI input terminals assigned to the input sources Setting contents e input sources are assigned to the HDMI input terminals as shown below HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 None Do not assign an HDMI input terminal to the selected input source X Upon purchase the settings of the different input sources are as shown below HDP pn CBL setting none HOM None setting e An input source to which an HDMI input terminal cannot be assigned is displayed as To play the video signal assigned at HDMI combined with the audio signal assigned at Input Assign Digital select Digital at Input Mode I page 59 e When the AVR 4810Cl and monitor are connected w
16. system buttons e Tuning down Channel down button TU V input source select buttons 117 e Tuning up Channel up button TU A SHIFT button 70 75 117 e FM AM band switching button BAND aina mode ur A anual biton OBESSE CHANNEL button eee 117 Preset memory button MEMO Q MENU 107 117 TUNER and HD Radio only Cursor buttons V 4 P 117 2 SEARCH button 86 118 Multi zone ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 operations 3 page 105 5 eo ie RANDOM button 86 118 L Punch through settin age 116 9 9 pag B Remote control signal transmitter 3 D ZONE SELECT button 119 B Zone power on off buttons 106 D Advanced setup button es 119 MAIN ZONE call button 119 Master volume control buttons 106 D Muting button MUTE 106 D MEMORY button 117 D ENTER button mss 117 RETURN button mme 117 System orem re eom bee wine 117 ALL MUSIC FAVORITES DIRECT PLAY button mmm 117 23 USB DIRECT PLAY button 81 119 REPEAT RANDOM USB RAVORITES DENON RC 1121 Connections Important Information Connections for all compatible audio and video signal formats are described in this o
17. STEPS Measurement Please place the microphone at ear height at 2nd listening position Next Calculation E ment Outi X To skip this step select Next Calculation and proceed to STEPS Repeat step 2H 2 B 8 auto setup 0 measuring positions ES 3 8 When measurement of position 8 15 completed a Measurements ae finished message is displayed pu e RN I X To skip this step select Next Calculation and proceed to STEP4 X Measure in at least 6 positions in and around the main listening position Even though you can complete measurement with at least 6 positions it is advisable to use more than 6 a maximum of 8 positions Moves the cursor Confirm the setting On the screen select Next Calculation and then press ENTER DENON AUTO SETUP YOYSSEY 12 3 4 5 6 STEP4 Calculation Now calculating Please wait Measuring results are analyzed and the frequency response of each speaker in the listening room is determined X Analysis takes several minutes to complete The time required for this analysis depends on the number of speakers connected The more connected speakers there are the longer it takes to perform analysis STEP5 Check 5 On the STEPS press A NZ I AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP screen PU m to select the item you 50008 FEES eck processing results want to check and then press ENTER Speaker C
18. say gt D gt Q SR KX F A NS g a Sly un 6 4 Output signal Stereo L R X Mono signals are outputted when Amp Assign Assign Mode is set to FREE and the signal assigned to the power amp is set to Z2 7Z3 2 Zone Playback by Audio Output PRE OUT OPT OUT Audio Connections ZONE2 ZONE3 The audio signals of the AVR 4810Cl s ZONE2 and ZONES audio output terminals are output to the ZONE2 and ZONES amplifiers and played on these amplifiers ZONE2 M 1 1 M AUX IN MAIN ZONE EPTT AVR 4810CI ZONES3 C LL C AUX IN Also be sure to read the operating instructions of the connected devices eWe recommend using high quality pin plug cables for audio connections in order to prevent noise e Vhen the input source to which the digital input connectors OPTICAL COAXIAL are assigned is selected in ZONE2 or ZONES playback is only possible if the digital signal being input is in PCM 2 channel format e t 15 not possible to play the digital audio signals input from the HDMI or DENON LINK terminals in ZONE2 and ZONE3 e When certain digital signals are being input noise may be output from the ZONE2 and ZONES audio output connectors e n ZONE
19. DTS HD DOLBY DOLBY Media Audio i Surround Mode ANALOG PCM is P Binh DTS ots prs poy POY piema DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY pem psp psp WAV Master pesolution EXPRESS 5 1ch 96 24 TrueHD Withno DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL nuttich 2ch multi ch 2ch AAC FLAC With Flag With Flag Plus 5 1 5 4ch 4 3ch 2ch Audio Flag Flag STANDARD DTS SURROUND DTS HD MSTR DTS HD HI RES DTS ES DSCRT6 1 DIS ES MTRXG6 1 DTS SURROUND DTS 96 24 DTS HD PLIIx CINEMA DTS HD PLIIx MUSIC DTS HD DIS EXPRESS DTS HD NEO 6 DTS NEOs CINEMA DTS NEO 6 MUSIC DOLBY SURROUND DOLBY TrueHD DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL EX DOLBY D HD EX DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY D D HD PLIIx CINEMA DOLBY D D HD PLIIx MUSIC DOLBY D D HD PLIIz DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIz HEIGHT DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx CINEMA DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx MUSIC DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx GAME DOLBY PRO LOGIC II CINEMA DOLBY PRO LOGIC II MUSIC DOLBY PRO LOGIC II GAME DOEBY PRO LOGIC SE X ES X ES X ES ES XxX Be X lt ES Bae Bae Be X ES X EM gt x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x O x O OBI x ES Bae gt Ba gt OBI x ES ES ES gt ES x gt OBI x ES ES gt ES Xx gt lt x Ba OC Ba OC O Ba gt E3 gt E30 lt x Ba O ES O ISI O ES gt E3 gt IM gt lt x
20. HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia e Blu ray Disc Player DVD Player IS page 18 e Control dock for iPod I page 19 e CD Player I page 19 e Record Player IG page 19 1 Connecting the Recording Components e Digital Video Recorder I page 20 Deep Color HDMI OUT HDMI HDMI OUT HDMI OUT HDMI OUT OUT O gt gt T Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC _1 Functions Usable with HDMI Connections e Video Cassette Recorder I 20 Eliminates on screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors Enables increased contrast ps See SE im E Connect the Tuner ra tio 9 DVD 5 SAT CBL VCR Po zen DVR VCR DVR MONITOR EI AME VD 3 CD DENON usan DIGITAL rg m ALALLAAN AAA lie IL NL SY NL I BETES BEB q p LA oboo e TV I page 21 e Satellite Receiver Cable Tuner IG page 21 x v Color e XM I page 21 Lets HDTVs display colors more accurately Enables displays with mA PrN PR Ses Se IE e SIRIUS I page 22 natural vivid colors x v Color is a Sony registered trademark Rear Panel e FM AM 57 page 22 A uto Lip Sync F page 43 male pee el IE page ao If you connect the receiver to a TV that supports the Auto Lip Sync NON
21. 7X1 Affects the currently selected zone X2 In ZONE4 only input sources to which XM HD Radio NET USB and digital input have been assigned be selected X3 HD Radio only X4 The input source switches to NET USB and the files on the USB memory device are played X5 The input source switches to NET USB and the files in All Music on the music server are played X6 The input source switches to NET USB and the files in Favorites are played Whether All Music or Favorites is selected depends on the Direct Play setting IGS page 62 DIRECT PLAY button e Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu Direct Play FAVORITES Playback starts from the first track registered in the favorites ALL MUSIC Playback starts from the first track registered in the All Music folder e When USB is pressed playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device When the music server is stopped or restarted it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites 117 JJ e o gt e JJ e gt P Las 1 2 Operating the Sub Remote Control Unit NET USB Zoneselecion M 2 Bz 2 M z2 B 7 ZONE SELECT Zone operation mode selection ZONEOFF X Power turned off X1 ZONEON Power turned on 7X1 Preset channel selection Preset channel memory block selection p VOLUME
22. BUTTON ENTER AVP lt STATUS gt SOURCE SELECT MAIN mode USB Sub remote control unit Use this procedure to play music files image files or playlists 1 Playback preparation D Check the network environment then turn on the AVR 4810Cls power I page 26 Connecting to a Home Network LAN 2 If settings are required make the Network Connecting IZ page 46 3 Prepare the instructions computer Computer s operating Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select Ey 125 page 31 Switching the main remote control unit to the NET USB mode i73 page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Use A V to select the server including the file to be played then press ENTER or gt Press A V to select the search item or folder then press ENTER or gt Press A V to select the file then press ENTER or gt Playback starts once buffering reaches 10096 Adjust the items below 1 Adjusting the master volume z page 85 2 Selecting the surround mode iz page 87 21 Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality a page 90 Oo Ci C 1 To stop t amp page 85 L Stopping playback temporarily iz amp page 85 L Selecting tracks t amp page 85 J Playing repeatedly i page 86 2 Playing in random order t amp page 86 L Searching pages iz page 86 L Searching by first letter iz page 86 Playing Files
23. Format Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using e NTSC Select NTSC output e PAL Select PAL output Format can also be set by the following procedure However the GUI screen is not displayed 1 Press and hold the main unit s DSX and RETURN for at least 3 seconds Video Format appears on the display 2 Press 1 gt and set the video signal format 3 Press the main unit s ENTER MENU or RETURN to complete the setting When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set the picture will not be displayed properly Text Display the content of operation during switching of surround mode input mode etc e ON Turn display on e OFF Turn display off Master Volume Master volume display during adjustment Bottom Display at the bottom e Top Display at the top e OFF Turn display off When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed on movie subtitles set to Top NET USB Set the NET USB screen display time when the input source is NET USB e Always Show display continuously e 30s Show display for 30 seconds after operation e 10s Show display for 10 seconds after operation e OFF Turn display off e OFF Screen saver is not activated Main remote control unit operation buttons ROH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the se
24. O ESI O Ba gt ES gt lt x Ba Ba tO X ESO Ba O O Ba O Ba O ES O ISI O ES Oe E3 gt gt lt x Ba O ES O ISI O x gt x ES x ES xX Ba gt Ba gt gt Bax x Ba x ES xX Ba gt ES Ba xX gt x Ba x Ba gt Ba gt Ba Ba gt gt x Ba x ES gt ES gt ES Ba gt gt x ES x ES xX gt Ba gt Bax x Ba x ES xX Ba gt Ba ES gt gt OBI x ES ES Ba x gt X ES X OC ES X ES x ES 5 gt a gt gt X EM X ES LM X EM X ES LS X EM X ES LEM X EX X E X EX X EM LEM X EM X ES X EX X X X X X X X ELSE X EX X X X X X X X ES X EX X X ES X E X X o x x x x x x x x x x x EN x ES x ES INI x Ox x ES x ES X ES ISI x Ox x EN x ES x ES ISI x Ox x X X X X X e x x O x O O O x x x x x x x x x ES x ES X lt E3 xX OO BE x 0 x EI x 01 10 0 10 0 O A 9 A B3 ES X E A 9 lt B3 ES X ES ES ES 9 gt ES Be m A Ed O 01 BEN X 54 54 ae x Be Om OR x x x NOTE 1 This mode is not availa
25. Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode We recommend always using the sub remote control unit for the same room When this is done the unit can be set so that the zone does not switch when buttons are operated 1 Use the tip of a pen to press ADVANCED SETUP All the multi zone indicators light Select the multi zone to be set The selected multi zone indicator lights CD To set to ZONE Press REPEAT 2 To setto ZONED Press RANDOM setio ZONES Press USB set to ZONE4 Press ALL MUSIC FAVORITES 3 Use the tip of a pen to press ADVANCED SETUP The multi zone indicator turns off To Cancel 1 Use the tip of a pen to press ADVANCED SETUP The currently selected multi zone indicator lights Press ZONE SELECT All the multi zone indicators light 3 Use the tip of a pen to press ADVANCED SETUP The multi zone indicator turns off Operating the Sub Remote Control Unit Setting the Remote ID When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room make this setting so that no AV receiver other than the desired one operates 1 While pressing MENU press ADVANCED SETUP with the tip of a pen The multi zone indicator corresponding to the currently selected remote ID flashes 2 Select the remote ID to be set D To set to 1 Press REPEAT The M indicator flashes 2 To set to 2 Press
26. Turning Off the Sound Temporarily Muting Press MUTE e The sound is reduced to the level set at Mute Level 87 53 e To cancel press MUTE again Muting can also be canceled by adjusting the master volume Listening with Headphones Plug the headphones into the PHONES jack on the main unit The sound from the speakers and pre out connectors is automatically Cut e o prevent hearing loss do not raise the volume level excessively when using headphones e Remove your headphones when performing Audyssey Auto Setup or adjusting the speaker volume To Stop During playback either press and hold ENTER or press E Stopping Playback Temporarily During playback press ENTER H or B gt Hl on the sub remote control unit Press again to resume playback yoeqheld Fast forwarding or Fast reversing During playback press and hold lt 4 lt 4 fast reverse or gt fast forward or press and hold AV X Control Dock for iPod only To Cue to the Beginning of a Track During playback either press 19 to search for previous tracks or gt to search for subsequent tracks or press AV 8 Operations During Playback Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit gt BUTTON Playing Repeatedly Playing in Random Order Press REPEAT Press RANDOM
27. m mom m m n 2 m9 Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit BUTTON Button only on the main unit BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON QUICK SELECT Connections Completed Turning the Power On Press lt POWER gt The power indicator lights red and the power is set to the standby mode Press MAIN to switch the main remote control unit to MAIN mode 1257 page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Press lt ON STANDBY gt or POWER The power indicator flashes green and the power turns on X Also press INPUT SOURCE SELECT or QUICK SELECT when in standby mode the power turns on When INPUT SOURCE SELECT has been pressed the input source set with the INPUT SOURCE SELECT is set If a QUICK SELECT has been pressed the input source stored in the memory for the quick select function is set I page 101 Saving Frequently Used Settings Quick Select Function Turning the Power Off Press MAIN to switch the main remote control unit to MAIN mode 1257 page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Press lt ON STANDBY gt or POWER OFF The power is set to the standby mode Press POWER The power indicator turns off and so does the p
28. CIT OFF Cancel repeat mode process If an FM station cannot be preset automatically select the desired m Random ON Enable random playback station by tuning it in manually then preset it manually A g Make random mode OFF Disable random playback D settings Setting Preset Channels so that They are not Displayed GUI Making the Settings to Play Still Pictures GUI When Tuning Preset Skip Still Picture Default settings are underlined Default settings are underlined E Setting items Setting contents This can be set when the input source is NET USB A T This can be set when the input source is siRius HD Radio TUNER mm _ _ et the preset channels tha Setting items Setting contents ou alo rei All All the preset channels in the selected memory block are skipped Slide Show ON Display still picture images in a slide show 1 8 Set the preset channels you do not want to displayed Make slide show settings OFF Display only the selected still picture image ON Display the selected preset channel Interval 55 60s e Skip Do not display the selected preset channel vet the playback time per 2 When set to All to Skip itis possible to skip entire preset memory Innes blocks A to G RCH i Main remote control unit Displaying the menu Sa f Moves the cursor 63 Up Down Left Right or Co
29. Chroma Level 6 0 6 Adjust picture chroma level saturation Hue 6 0 6 Adjust color hue DNR OFF Low Middle High Reduce overall picture noise Enhancer 0 12 Emphasize picture contours yoeqheld e DNR and Enhancer are each effective with HDMI output e The value set at Picture Adjust is stored in the memory individually for each input source RCH Main remote control unit Displaying the menu Sa Moves the cursor 95 Up Down Left Right re Confirm the setting em Return to previous menu Cancel the menu operation buttons v 9 lt D T A T Setting items Status Shows information about current settings Checking the Status Information Setting contents LJ MAIN ZONE Shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE The items displayed differ according to the input source Zone Rename Select Source Surround Mode Input Mode Decode Mode HDMI Digital Component iPod dock Rec Select Video Select Video Convert i p Scaler Resolution Progressive Mode Aspect etc Setting items Auto Surround AUTO Mode Shows information about auto surround mode settings Setting contents Analog PCM 2ch Digital 2ch Digital 5 1ch Multi ch P This can be displayed when Auto Surround Mode is set to ON LI ZONE2 ZONES ZONE4 Shows information about settings for mu
30. PURE DIRECT mode the DSD signals are converted as such into analog signals When x For operating instructions refer to the respective equipment s playing in other surround modes the DSD signals are first converted operating instructions into PCM format then into analog signals e DSD DIRECT is shown on the display when playing DSD 2 channel Start recording signals in the DIRECT mode DSD MULTI DIRECT is shown on 5 the display when playing DSD multi channel signals in the DIRECT For operating instructions refer to the respective eguipment s mode operating instructions 4 Play the program source CI MAIN INPUT SOURCE SELECT TTT 557 98 e To cancel press lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT then turn SOURCE SELECT until ZONE2 SOURCE is displayed e Make a test recording before starting the actual recording e Signals are only output to the analog REC OUT connectors when the digital signals input to the digital input connectors OPTICAL COAXIAL are PCM 2 channel signals e As the digital audio signal input from the HDMI connector is not output to the digital recording connector OPTICAL you should connect using the OPTICAL and COAXIAL connectors e Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE2 as well e n the REC OUT mode the remote control units ZONE2 mode buttons cannot be operated e The XM and HD Radio digital audio outp
31. Viewing Still Pictures and Videos on an iPod in the Remote Mode Photos and videos on an iPod equipped with a slide show or video function can be played using a DENON ASD 1R or ASD 11R control dock for iPod Press and hold SEARCH to set the Remote mode Remote iPod is displayed on the AVR 4810CI s display Watching the iPod s screen use AV to select Photos or Videos X Depending on the iPod model it may be necessary to operate the iPod unit directly 3 Press ENTER until the image you want to view is displayed TV Out at the iPod s Slide show Settings or Video Settings must be set to On in order to display the iPod s photo data or videos on the monitor For details see the iPod s operating instructions Video may not be output depending on the combination of ASD 1R or ASD 11R DENON control dock for iPod and iPod 67 yoeqheld Playing Components Playing an iPod Connected Directly to Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit BUTTON Button only on the main unit BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON the AVR 4810Cl s USB Port e Music stored on an iPod can be played on the AVR 4810CIl when the AVR 4810Cl and iPod are connected by USB cable e The AVR 4810Cl supports iPod 5th generatio
32. X f you want to learn other buttons repeat steps 4 and 5 The mode can be switched by pressing DEVICE SELECTOR X The signal transmission indicator lights once for a long time if learning was not possible Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting Is completed e With some remote control units the signals cannot be learned or the device will not operate properly even when the signals have been learned In this case use the device s own remote control unit e earned buttons have priority over the preset memory If you no longer need the learned setting reset the learning function IG page 116 e POWER ON POWER OFF and SOURCE SELECT cannot be learned e Do not learn any remote control signals at RC SETUP e he MAIN ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 and MACRO modes cannot be learned e Codes cannot be learned at MASTER VOLUME or MUTE when the main remote control unit is set to TUNER SAT TU DTU NEHUSB or IPod 113 JJ e gt e JJ e o gt P Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Signal transmission indicator DEVICE lS SAT CBL SELECTOR 2228 SET am CB IBIBVCRDVR la gt cay tes ta moo A RTV PPI lt lt gt gt B Signal transmission indicator DEVICE
33. X S VIDEO S VIDEO e he GUI menu display cannot be superimposed when x v Color signals computer s X x x COMPONENT X Only the OSD menu is displayed resolution e g VGA are input x x COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO O O x COMPONENT S VIDEO O S VIDEO 3 On screen display is not Superimposed on the picture indicated in Buljooysajqnoiy Troubleshootino If a problem should arise first check the following 1 Are the connections correct 2 Is the set being operated as described in the owner s manual 3 Are the other components operating properly If this unit does not operate properly check the items listed in the table below Should the problem persist there may be a malfunction In this case disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase General Symptom Cause Countermeasure Set does not operate Reset the microprocessor 134 properly Power does not e Check that the power plugs are securely inserted into the AVR 28 4810Cl s AC inlet and the wall power outlet turn on or turns off directly after it was turned on No sound is produced Check the connections to the input devices and the speaker cable from speakers connections e Check the connections to the playback devices and select the appropriate input source e Adjust the master volume to an appropriate level e Cancel the mute mode e Disconnect the headphones No sound is output fr
34. is performed in the DENON LINK 4th mode When a disc other than a BD is played with the input mode set to Auto playback is DENON LINK 4th he clock of the AV lifi SOURCE SELECT i KD Mice pal automatically performed in the DENON LINK 3rd mode DENON LINK to achieve HDMI signal transfer with little jitter when e When the input mode is set to HDMI normal HDMI playback is playing BD lt performed 5 e When the input mode is set to Digital playback is fixed to the 9 1 Assign HDMI to the input source to be used and DENON LINK 3rd mode and BDs cannot be played assign D LINK to the Digital setting 1257 page 59 Input Assign Set HDMI Control Control 2857 page 44 to ON 3 Either turn lt SOURCE SELECT gt or press INPUT SOURCE SELECT to select the input source assigned in step 1 The FP indicator lights on the display 4 Set Input Mode 1257 page 61 to AUTO EI MAIN 22 Select the surround mode 1257 page 87 Selecting the Surround Mode Surround Mode Start playing the BD Playback starts INPUT SOURCE SELECT 97 Other Operations Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit BUTTON Button only on the main unit BU
35. 10060 Ts 10011 10054 10208 11217 10178 10001 10036 10053 10156 10208 10054 11602 10178 10195 10047 10030 10092 11599 A 11904 12917 10178 10000 10011 10017 10053 10150 10154 10810 11505 11685 11751 11904 10178 11922 11826 10156 11498 10171 10154 10008 10864 10000 10054 10865 10000 10047 10154 11271 11904 10000 11944 11144 11834 10178 10171 10218 11944 10030 10051 10171 11886 11944 10171 10036 10054 10178 11864 10178 10060 11755 10030 10047 10178 10362 10702 11060 10171 10036 10154 11142 10017 10037 10054 10166 10668 10374 10200 11629 11756 11755 10556 10327 10036 10353 11651 10057 10092 10876 11886 11904 11240 11331 11610 10035 10054 10208 10370 10766 11903 10037 10170 10030 10047 10060 10171 10818 T Tandy Tatung Teac Technics Technovox Techwood Teco Tedelex Teknika Telecolor Telefunken Tevion Thomas Thomson TMK TNCi Tocom Toshiba Totevision Toyomenka Transonic Truetone Ultra Universal Universum V Vector Research Victor Vidikron Vidtech Viewpia Viewsonic Viking Viore Vizio Wards Waycon Welton Westinghouse White Westinghouse 10217 10000 11796 10009 10418 10717 10051
36. 2CH BA This is the usual configuration Bi wire the front speakers the front speakers Bi wire another front speaker for 2 channel play mode Bi amp another front speaker for 2 channel play mode 6 The following screen is displayed The speaker terminals and the output from the pre out terminals can be checked on this screen a Be ASSIGN Config 5 1ch Assign Mode 22 23 Front NORMAL X See page 14 D Current settings 2 Speaker terminal name 3 Signal being output from speaker terminal 4 Output from terminal X Terminals not being used are greyed out pot et it MC Me FRONT FRONT CENTER CENTER N SUAR SURR N SBIHW IAN I BV iB a lzoug2 zonez sw p NETS pre out 15 on how to connect the speakers Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting e When you are using speaker terminals for multi zone ZONE2 ZONES set Assign Mode 2 or Z2 Z3 e You can set in the same way as described in Amp Assign on page 34 Since Configuration of AVR A810CI is set to 5 1ch by default audio is not output from the surround back speakers When using the surround back speakers with MAIN ZONE set Configuration to something other than 5 1ch and then select SB in Extra Channel Set the Channels You will not Use Channel Skip If you set the channels you will not use before
37. Address is selected in step Input the address When Name is selected in step Input the domain name The types of characters that can be input are as shown below Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Symbols amp lt gt Q M Numbers 0123456789 Space You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input Network Standby Set the network function on off during standby e ON Network is on during standby Main unit operable with a network compatible controller e OFF Suspend network function during standby Set to ON when using the web control function I gt page 103 Character When characters are not displayed correctly set the MP3 ID3 Tag character code type reproduced by the USB memory device e Auto Auto select character code e Latin Select ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 e Japanese Select Shift JIS If the characters are not properly displayed when set to Auto set to Latin or Japanese PC Language Select computer environment language e ara chi smpl chi trad cze dan dut eng fin fre ger gre heb hun ita jpn kor nor pol por por BR rus spa swe tur Friendly Name Edit The Friendly Name is the name AVR 4810CI displayed on the network Up to 63 characters can be input The
38. Adjustment of volume 1 Adjustment of volume 1 MUTE Mating OT Muig K MENU GSeletedzonemenu Selectedzonemenu Preset memory registration Page forward screen Browse Remote mode switching press and hold RETURN Stop Play pause 1 track All track repeat play track random play Music server only FAVORITES X6 X6 Input source selection 7X2 Cursor Manual Search AV Page forward screen Character search lt lt gt TUNING A Y 7X1 Affects the currently selected zone 3X2 In ZONEA it is not possible to select XM HD Radio or sources with no digital input signals TUNER PHONO iPod etc Network audio signals Internet radio music server USB can be played as long as they are not copyright protected X4 The input source switches to NET USB and the files on the USB memory device are played X4 The input source switches to NET USB and the files in All Music on the music server are played X6 The input source switches to NET USB and the files in Favorites are played Whether All Music or Favorites is selected depends on the Direct Play setting 1 87 page 62 DIRECT PLAY button e Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu Direct Play FAVORITES Playback starts from the first track registered in the favorites ALL MUSIC Playback starts from the first track registered in the All Music
39. Connections Important lnformatloHh Cables Used Tor Connections ea 9 Converting Input Video Signals for Output Video Conversion Function seas pxpun o cece ses 10 Installing the Speakers NR 11 Speaker CONNECTIONS enmiendas oci e laor ica 14 Connecting DAVIGES TZ Connecting the Power Gord ror ror tm ERE ra et 28 Once Connections are Completed P 28 Turning the Pese Or eausa saa wax dd cured dd dddwd duds edel Kad i cei 28 Turning the Power 28 Settings GUI Menu Map T P 29 GUI Menu Operation 30 Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title eee 30 Examples of GUI Menu Screen Displays 30 Selecting the Input ellie RTT ie I ILL D DL emer tere rere 31 Make the Optimal Speaker Settings and Correct the Room Acoustics Audyssey Auto Setup E 32 Making Detailed Settings Manual Setup P 39 Making the Input Settings Source 57 Important Information a enn eicere eoe 66 Playing Components PE Ce ee eee IN Md ie ARES 66 Playing a Blu ray Disc Player DVD Player m 66 Playing an iPod Usin
40. Default Reset the settings to the default values e Yes Reset No Do not Reset 94 Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu Setting items RESTORER This function restores compressed audio signals to how they were before compression and corrects the sense of volume of the bass and treble to obtain richer playback sound Setting contents OFF Do not use RESTORER Mode 1 RESTORER 64 Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs Mode 2 RESTORER 96 Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources Mode 3 RESTORER HQ Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs This can be set with analog signals or when PCM signal fs 44 1 48 KHz is input This cannot be set when the input mode is set to EXT IN or when the surround mode is set to DIRECT e The default setting for iPod and NET USB are Mode 3 All others are set to OFF e When set to something other than OFF DEM is displayed e This can also be set by pressing RESTORER on the main remote control unit during playback B OFF Model gt Mode2 RESTORER 64 RESTORER J Mode 3 lt RESTORER HQ About the RESTORER function e Such compressed audio formats as MP3 WMA Windows Media Audio and MPEG 4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to
41. Yellow J Video cable Other cables DENON LINK cable be D Ethernet cable O gt T O gt T 7 Important Information Converting Input Video Signals for Output Video Conversion Function The AVR 4810CI has 4 different types of video input output terminal HDMI Component video S Video Video Use the terminals according to the devices to be connected This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to the AVR 4810CI into the format used to output the video signals from the AVR 4810Cl to a monitor I page 129 Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output Flow of video signals for MAIN ZONE ANVR 4810CI Monitor Video device Output Output IN MONITOR OUT Input HDMI connector HDMI connector HDMI connector HDMI connector Y PB CB PR CR Y PB CB PR CR P Y PB CB PR CR Y PB CB PR CR L 9 G0 9 000 Component video Component video Component video Component video connectors connectors connectors connectors Co LI LJ S Video connector S Video connector S Video connector S Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector Surround back gt When 4801 5761 signals are input speaker 10
42. e nput sources that are not going be used can be set ahead of time Make this setting at Source Delete IG page 53 e o turn off the source selection menu without selecting an input source press SOURCE SELECT again 2 Operating on the Main Remote Control Unit Press INPUT SOURCE SELECT The desired input source can be selected directly X To operate the AVR 4810CI using the main remote control unit set the remote control unit to the MAIN mode Ic 108 Operating the Connected Devices by Remote Control Unit X Pressing the VCR DVR button and the CD PHONO button on the main remote control unit will switch between the following VCR DVR CD PHONO CDT 3 Operating on the Main Unit Turn SOURCE SELECT gt X If ZONE2 3 4 Rec Select Video Select or Tuning Preset mode is selected for the input source press SOURCE before turning the SOURCE SELECT 31 Make the Optimal Speaker Settings and Correct the Room Acoustics Auto Setup D The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and When Using the Front Height Speakers listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made Important information Example Example automatically Audyssey MultEQY XT automatically measures the acoustical problems in the listening environment to create the best audio J Audyssey Auto Setup Flow experie
43. 1 2 3 4 When changing the remote ID also change the MAIN iPod TUNER SAT TU DTU and NET USB modes of the main remote control unit at the same time Also change the sub remote control unit at the same time I page 112 119 Setting the Remote ID Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting See overleaf Return to previous menu 55 o gt 7 o e gt 7 LETT BST Te EST DT EIE ETELE ATT Setting items 232C Port Set when using an external controller or two way remote control unit connected to the RS 232C terminal Setting contents Serial Control Set when using an external controller 2Way Remote Set when using a 2 way remote control unit When using a DENON two way remote control unit RC 7000CI or RC 7001RCI sold separately set to 2Way Remote When setting to 2Way Remote you can not use the RS 232C connector as an external controller Dimmer Adjust display brightness of the receiver Bright Normal display brightness Dim Reduced display brightness Dark Very low display brightness OFF Turns the display off Setup Lock Protect settings inadvertent change from OFF Turn protection off ON Turn protection on e When Setup Lock is set to ON the settings listed below longer be changed Also SETUP LOCKED 5 displayed If you attempt to operate related
44. 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz e This can be set when 2ch Direct Stereo Subwoofer is set to Yes e f the 2ch Direct Stereo Front setting is Large and the SW Mode setting is LFE Full Band is displayed and the setting cannot be made Distance FL Distance FR Select the speaker e 0 0ft 60 0ft 12 0ft 0 00m 18 00m 3 60m Set the distance to the speaker Set so that the difference between the front left speaker and front right speaker distances is 20 0 ft 6 0 m or less Setting items EQ Customize Set so that unused equalizer settings are not displayed when MULTEQ XT on the main remote control unit is pressed Equalizer settings for which Not Used is set with the Quick Select function cannot be stored and called out Setting contents Audyssey L R Set when not using Audyssey L R equalizer Used Use Not Used Do not use Set so that Audyssey L R settings can be made when Audyssey Auto Setup is performed Audyssey Flat Set when not using Audyssey Flat equalizer Used Use e Not Used Do not use Set so that Audyssey Flat settings can be made when Audyssey Auto Setup is performed Manual Set when not using the Manual equalizer Used Use Not Used Do not use Level FL Level FR Select the speaker e 12 0dB 12 0dB 0 0dB Adjust
45. ES ES E XxX ES XxX ES 2 Signals and adjustability in the different modes Parameter default values are shown in parentheses X Ba X ES X ES X ES X E X ES X ES ES X lt ES c ES E33 XxX ES X E amp X ES X ES X ES X Ba Be RG RS RG CIE X ES RG C ES RG RGO 9 x ae x Be x Be x DM x I0 x EN x ES x EN n TH EM 1 a 0 iO 299 E E ca cs es ea TI TI 2 O 1 NOTES NOTE6 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OR ES X ES EMO m ESI O ESI O ES T EM n EE n n T BEN BM NEM T EM T O ESI O ESI O ESI O TT EE n EE n T EM EX OR OR OM OM ORO MEE Cs NL LI Cs Ss lI es O T MultEQ XT Dynamic EQ Bs x Dynamic Volume x x x x O x O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O RESTORER O BO BO BO BO RS Bae S O ee OO O gt ES x ES X lt ES ISI OO O O EO WO Ba ESO Bae X lt 125 3 E gt Differences in Surround Mode Names Depending on the Input Signals Input signals DOLBY DIGITAL MULTI CH PCM super Audio CD
46. Flow of video signals for ZONE2 AVR 4810CI Monitor Video device Input Output Output IN MONITOR OUT Input Y PB CB PR CR Y PB CB PR CR Y PB CB PR CR Y PB CB PR CR 9 69 Component video connectors 9 69 Component video connectors O O Component video Component video connectors connectors 3 S Video connector S Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector Set as Necessary e Set when not using the video conversion function Video Convert 1257 page 60 e Set when changing the resolution of the video signal Resolution 157 61 Resolutions of HDMI compatible TVs can be checked at HDMI Information Monitor1 Monitor2 I page 96 e HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals e When a non standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input the video conversion function might not operate e 480p 576p 10801 720p 1080p component video input signals cannot be converted into S Video or Video format e When using the component video output connectors for connection to the ZONE2 monitor the ZONE2 s on screen display is not displayed Installing the Speakers J Installing the speakers The illustration below shows the recommended speaker layout Li When only one surround back
47. GoldStar Gradiente Grundig H amp B Harman Kardon Helios Hello Kitty HIMAX Hitachi Hiteker 30690 30 89 30672 30831 30833 30869 31483 30695 30571 30788 31086 31321 30831 30503 30539 30714 30816 31023 31129 31502 30705 30705 30714 30770 30833 30869 31172 30770 30770 30490 30634 31634 31844 32134 31005 30672 30675 30705 30675 909 31023 30521 30690 30591 30675 30821 31268 30591 30503 30539 30770 30821 31268 30651 30670 30675 31268 31158 30522 30815 30675 31268 30573 30715 30741 30744 30783 30833 30869 31044 31075 31099 31158 31483 SEO 30741 30869 30490 30651 30539 30705 30775 30850 30582 30702 31229 92192 30831 30843 30573 30664 31748 30672 Hyundai Insignia Integra IRT JBL JMB JVC Kenwood Kiiro Kiss Kloss Koss Lasonic Lecson Lenco Lenoxx LG LiteOn Loewe Logix Magnasonic Magnavox Marantz Mcintosh Medion Memorex MiCO Microsoft Minato Mitsubishi NAD Naiko NEC Onkyo Oppo Optimus Orion Oritron Palsonic Panasonic Philco Philips Pioneer 31588 30850 30675 31268 30571 30627 31634 31769 30783 30702 31926 30695 30558 30623 30867 31164 3127591500 3157 31901 30490 30534 30682 30770 30841 30533 30651 31061 30627 30789 31533 30774 30838 30591 30741 30869 31906 31058 31158 30511 30741 30783 3065
48. RO3 AAA batteries for RC 1121 FM indoor antenna 1 AM loop antenna small for AM broadcasts 2 AM loop antenna large for HD Radio broadcasts 3 Dipole antenna for HD Radio broadcasts Rod antenna for wireless LAN connection 5 Setup microphone DM A409 Cord length Approx 25 ft 7 6 m About the Remote Control Unit In addition to the AVR 4810CI the included main remote control unit RC 1126 can also be used to operate the equipment listed below D DENON system components 2 Non DENON system components e o operate component products other than DENON you must set the preset code IS page 109 Presetting e f you are using a non DENON AV device or if you cannot operate the device even after registering the preset code memorize the other device s remote control signal in the AVR 4810Cl remote control unit page 113 Learning Function Inserting the Batteries D Lift the clasp and remove the rear lid RC 1126 RC 1121 2 Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks in the battery compartment RC 1126 RC 1121 RO3 AAA LR6 AA e Insert the specified batteries in the remote control unit e Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit The supplied batteries are only for verifying operation e When inserting the batteries be sure to do so in the proper direction fol
49. SAT CBL 4 eu ASSIGNABLE HDP VCR DVR B bvcn _ MONITORY do OO o o o o ti 3 CD DIGITAL VIDEO ASSIGNABLE oe nr 5 9 9 AN W n z is em o6 X S m SZ m 000 AUDIO DVD SAT CBL_VCR Pod DVR VER FM AG px mu SIRIUS 9 D o 2 YE Y UN 1 2 STRAGHT Qo z CAB ROOM TO ROOM C 12V 150mA MAX o fmo b 9 9 SIGNAL PHONO UDIO CD END s 1 TRIGGER OUT jacks The TRIGGER OUT output terminal outputs a maximum 12 V 150 mA electrical signal When a device with TRIGGER IN terminal is connected via a monaural mini plug the connected device s power on standby can be controlled through linked operation to the AVR 4810Cl SPEAKERS Set as Necessary Set to change the conditions for linked operation via the TRIGGER OUT 1 or TRIGGER OUT 2 terminal Trigger Out1 or Trigger Out2 1227 page 55 When connecting 2nd device connect to the TRIGGER OUT 2 terminal in the same way as the TRIGGER OUT 1 terminal Connecting to a Home Network LAN When you connect the AVR 4810Cl to a home network you can enjoy listening to music files stored on your PC internet radio audio and other sources You can also control the AVR
50. Samsung Sansui mou N JI Sharp Sova Sylvania T Toshiba 10154 10171 10030 10650 10030 10000 10017 10030 10037 10047 10092 10145 10171 10178 10812 11145 11423 11904 11911 11933 11675730695 11943 1952 11937 30695 30695 11394 30675 31268 31268 31268 31268 11960 31247 31268 11933 11962 11866 31268 11941 31490 11961 30854 31260 11523 11962 1969 11948 11958 31022 11903 30899 30695 10818 11952 11394 11864 11886 30675 31268 32194 11524 30695 Television DVD Video deck Combination A Akai B E Emerson ESA M Magnavox P Panasonic RCA S Sharp Sylvania Superscan Sylvania 11903 30899 11938 11944 30821 11944 30821 11944 30821 11946 11947 31362 31462 11953 31132 11917 30630 11944 30821 30821 5 PRESET CODE Symphonic T Toshiba 11944 30821 11945 31045 Television Video deck Combination America Action Audiovox Broksonic Daewoo Emerson Funal GE Hitachi JVC Lloyd s Magnasonic Magnavox Magnin Memorex MGA Mitsubishi Optimus Orion Panasonic Penney Quasar RadioShack RCA Samsung Sansui Sanyo Sears Sony Symphonic Thomas T yy White Z o DO U o Westinghouse Zenith A Mark ABsat ADB AGS Akai Alba Allsat Alltech Amstrad Harley Davidson 20278 20278 11911 11909 11909 11911 20593 11904 11917 11922 20240 1190
51. Use of a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies e None Select when the surround back speakers are not connected e 2spkrs Use two surround back speakers e 1spkr Use only one surround back speaker When you select this setting connect the surround back speaker to the left L channel e When Configuration is set to 5 1ch in the Amp Assign settings or when SB is not selected using Extra Channel no settings can be made for Surround Back e Even when the Surround Back Speaker setting is other than None sound may not be emitted from the surround back speaker depending on the playback source In this case Surround Parameters Surround Back setting other than OFF 87 page 91 low frequencies e None Select when a center speaker is not connected Large is not displayed when Front is set to Small Main remote control unit operation buttons ROH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right See overleaf Confirm the setting Return to previous menu 41 o e 7 o e gt 7 LETT BST Te EST DT EIE ETELE ATT Setting items Speaker Configuration Continued Setting contents Front Height Set the presence and size of the front height speakers e Large Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies e Small Use of a smal
52. Video select button V SEL See Operations Possible by Main Remote Control Unit rz amp page 7 8 for more information f Multi zone power buttons e Muiti zone power on button ON B Power operation buttons e Muiti zone power off button OFF POWER ON OFF 28 106 Device power buttons D cursor buttons 4 b oes 30 eDevice power on button ON ENTER button ns 30 e Device power off button OFF D Return button RTN OM ies 30 System buttons SOURCE SELECT button 31 2 D Master volume control buttons VOL 85 e Disc skip up button Skip D Muting button MUTE e 85 e Skip button Fett gt e Play button Me RC SETUP button 109 j e Search button 4 gt gt J eStill Pause button Stop button Bl The time for which the backlight stays on KB QUICK SELECT button be changed 87 page 115 Setting the Time the D MACRO butt Backlight Stays Lit 9 utton RC 1126 D Part Names and Functions 23 P E Selected Device Function button B Sub Remote Control Unit RC 1121 8 utton name o select button indicator 2 ee zi ZONE indicators 119 o 135 Preset Channel buttons 75 9 QUICK SELECT buttons 101 107
53. Volume Level setting I gt page 52 is Variable Power On Level Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned Last Use the memorized setting from the last session 0 Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on 80dB 18dB 1 99 The volume is adjusted to the set level Can be set when the multi zone Volume Level setting I gt page 52 is Variable HPF OFF The low range is not attenuated Make settings for cutting ON The low range is attenuated the low range to reduce distortion in the bass Lch Level 12dB 12dB OdB Adjust the left channel Lch Level can be set when Channel I 52 is set to output level Stereo Rch Level 12dB 12dB OdB Adjust the right channel X Ihe Rch Level can be set when Channel I amp amp 52 is set to output level Stereo Channel Stereo Select stereo output Set the signal output from multi zone Mono Select mono output Nhen Amp Assign Assign Mode I page 41 is set to FREE and the signal assigned to the power amp is set to 72 73 M the Channel setting automatically becomes Mono Mute Level Set the amount of attenuation when muting 15 on Full The sound is muted entirely 40dB The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down 20dB The sound is attenuated by 2
54. X If a LAN cable is connected remove it 2 Turn on the AVR 4810CI rz amp page 28 Turning the Power On 3 Set the access point at the Network Connecting When searching access points to connect automatically refer to Automatic settings When searching access points to connect manually refer to Manual settings 1 Automatic settings gt NETWORK CONNECTING DENON Select a connection method appropriate for your wireless LAN host Manual Search and set the access 5 d amp NETWORK CONNECTING Please select access point to connect Search Enter Cancel Select access point to connect D On the GUI menu select Network Connecting Search and press ENTER The access point you have set is displayed 2 Use to select the access point and then press ENTER The DHCP function is disabled 46 Main remote control unit y Setting items Network Connecting Continued Setting contents X If the access points are repeat search use V to select the Search and press ENTER e gt NETWORK CONNECTING Please select access point to connect N DENON WEP Cancel Select access point to connect 3 If there is an encryption setting for the access point you selected in step 2 enter same encryption key as used for the access point If there is no encryption setting proceed to step 5 gt NETWORK CONNECTING DENON Enter same encrypt
55. and its subsidiaries All rights reserved Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is assigned Input Assign 1257 page 58 21 Connecting Devices SIRIUS Connector FM AM e The AVR 4810CI is a SIRIUS Satellite Radio Ready receiver Youcan Keep the power cord unplugged until the SiriusConnect Home Tuner F type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio by connecting to the SiriusConnect connection have been completed Home Tuner and subscribing to the SIRIUS service e Plug the SIRIUS connector on the SIRIUS service e Position the Home Tuner antenna near a south facing window to receive the best signal For details see Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio 187 page 73 When making connections also refer to the operating instructions of Positioning the Antenna the SiriusConnect Home Tuner For a consistent satellite signal the antenna must be positioned correctly Use the following map to determine which area you are in and position the antenna accordingly Direction of broadcasting station SIRIUS XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of FM antenna Sirius XM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries All rights reserved Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii O gt T 7 AM loop antenna small supplied 75 O ohms Coaxial cable SiriusConn
56. e The artist name song title category and reception level can be checked by pressing lt STATUS gt e The time default 30 sec for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set GUI Tuner I page 54 Press A V gt to return to the original screen Checking the XM Signal Strength and Radio ID Press STATUS until SIGNAL appears on the display The display will switch as shown below depending on the reception conditions GOOD Signal strength is good WEAK Y Signal strengthis weak NO Y jNosgnl O Adjust the position of the antenna until SIGNAL GOOD is shown on the display Press STATUS until the channel example XM001 is displayed 4 Press TU A or TU V and select channel 0 XM000 The radio ID is shown on the display Radio ID The strength of both the XM satellite and terrestrial signals be checked Antenna Aiming IG page 64 71 yoeqheld v lt T Tuning in Radio Stations XM Satellite Radio lt SOURCE SELECT gt Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit _ gt BUTTON Button only on the main unit BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON ENTER TUNING gt
57. e When tuning in stations manually press and hold TU A or TU V to change frequencies continuously e he time default 30 sec for which the GUI menu is displayed can be set GUI Tuner page 54 Press AV 1 gt to return to the original screen Presetting Radio Stations Preset Memory Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily Up to 56 stations can be preset 1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset 2 Press MEMO Press A G to select the block in which the channel is to be preset then press CHANNEL or 1 8 to select the preset number The memory block can also be selected by pressing SHIFT on the sub remote control unit 4 Press MEMO again to complete the setting To preset other stations repeat steps 1 to 4 e Stations can be preset automatically at Auto Preset I page 63 Preset stations are erased by overwriting them Listening to Preset Stations 1 Press A G to select the memory block A to G Press CHANNEL or 1 8 to select the desired preset 2 You can also operate the main unit In this case perform the following operations Press lt TUNING PRESET gt then turn lt SOURCE SELECT gt to select the preset radio station station Tuning in Radio Stations FM AM Broadcasts L Default settings Auto tuner presets E8 90 1 MHz F1 F8 90 1 MHz G1 G8 9
58. folder e When USB is pressed playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device When the music server is stopped or restarted it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites 118 OO ADVANCED da SETUP O ZONE CALL MENU ALL MUSIC REPE AT C di FAVORITES USB RANDOM Lees Switching Zones Use this procedure to select the zone to be operated by the sub remote control unit Press ZONE SELECT The currently selected multi zone indicator lights 2 While the multi zone indicator is light press ZONE SELECT to select the zone to be operated The currently selected multi zone indicator lights LIS c COR M 72 273 2 M 72 273 74 5 _ uM Switching the Multi zone Input Source to the Same Input Source as Used in the MAIN ZONE This function is convenient for example when you want to listen to the same song as the one playing in the MAIN ZONE while in a different zone Press ZONE SELECT and set to ZONE2 ZONE3 or ZONE4 The currently selected multi zone indicator lights Press M ZONE CALL on the sub remote control unit The multi zone input source switches to the MAIN ZONE s input source e his cannot be used for the MAIN ZONE e When M ZONE CALL is pressed while the multi zone power is off the multi zone power turns on and the input source switches to the MAIN ZONE s input source
59. 10030 10051 11040 10698 10054 10178 10017 10074 10625 10037 10001 10047 10625 10178 10017 10156 10011 10070 10156 10508 11145 11356 11704 10051 10178 10698 10051 10092 10047 10009 10070 10361 10885 10030 10053 10054 10036 10876 1085 7 ee 10060 10054 10864 11758 10000 10035 10054 10195 10156 10178 10000 11577 10623 PRESET CODE 10218 10037 10037 10455 11037 10054 10217 10060 10060 10109 10702 10556 10047 10109 11447 10035 10145 10166 10650 11156 11508 11945 10712 10011 10170 10418 TIL 11629 10178 10864 11627 11207 10885 10001 10037 10154 10866 10885 11712 10889 10051 10217 10154 10264 10698 10706 10226 10092 10150 10335 10343 10668 11137 10178 11904 10287 10343 10036 10060 10150 10154 10217 10264 10718 10845 11164 11256 11524 11656 10036 10037 10217 10264 10512 10631 11756 10885 11330 11738 12067 11755 11756 10017 10030 10047 10051 10166 10178 11156 10889 11282 4 X 1000 Y Yamaha Yorx 7 Zenith Television DVD Combination crc FO mow gt Advent Akai Apex Digital Audiovox Axion Broksonic Citizen Emerson ESA Funai GFM Hitachi Insignia Jensen KLH Magnavox Panasonic Philips Polaroid Prima RCA
60. 1126 Operations on devices other that the AVR 4810CI e Preset the remote control codes of the devices to be operated 37 page 109 e gt o e Q Signal transmission indicator 108 e he function button indicator changes depending on the Device select button you have selected n HMM EL baton Zone indicators MACRO indicator 108 MENU button esses 30 E H9 XT button MULTEO SEARCH button 86 button SPKR RESTORER button RSTR 94 Aum O Sleep timer button SLEEP Q cHANNEL LEVEL button 100 Al 7 1 DYNAMIC EQ button DYN EQ Channel buttons 70 75 9 DYNAMIC VOLUME button DYN VOL Input source select buttons 31 PARTY En mode buttons cmi Number buttons esses 70 75 79 ee e STANDARD button STD I MULTEG DYN DYN VOL INPUT b 110 SLEEP _ VSEL Mee E P e PURE DIRECT button PURE mra e DIRECT STEREO button D ST mm Remote control signal transmitter 3 eDSP SIMULATION button SIMU B QUICK SELECT button 101 107 PARTY button MACRO button CER ED CORO PRR eee ea eae ee 114 9 Monitor select button M SEL MM Function buttons
61. 1A MAX O O S O B O 7 O Y Tm 5 ANT KO LC ROOM TO ROOM DC 12V 150mA MAX SPEAKERS un pss sp Vui l 5 A FRONT CENTER SURROUND S BACK FHEIGHT FWIDE ZONE2 ZONES PHONO AUDIO cD ee SPEAKER MPEDANCE SPEAKERS Set as Necessary To play analog signals input from the external input EXT IN When using just one surround back speaker connect it to the let When speakers have been connected to PRE OUT terminals do not terminal set Input Mode I page 61 to EXT IN channel L connect the speakers to the speaker terminals e Use the volume control on the subwoofer to control subwoofer volume When a device is connected to the SBL SBR terminal of the external f the subwoofer volume sounds low use the volume control input terminals EXT IN set Amp Assign Extra Channel I page provided on the subwoofer to adjust the volume 41 to SB 25 O gt T O gt T d 7 Connecting Devices External Controller Ld RS 232C connector When you connect an external control device you can control the AVR 4810Cl with the external control device Perform the operation below beforehand D Turn on the AVR 4810CI s power 2 Turn off the AVR 4810Cl s power from the external controller 3 Che
62. 2 of zz O O ON O O X ES X ES X ES XxX ES XxX ES 0 694 9 lt A X ES X ES X ES ES X ES X Height Cinema Cinema Cinema x X Ba X ES X ES XxX ES X lt ES X lt ES XxX ES xX E X ES X ES X lt ES RS X lt ES ES X lt ES X ES RS ES Il lI o EM 2 O EMI O Of ES ES ES ES ES ES gt ES Be x e Surround Mode PURE DIRECT DIRECT 2ch PSD Dine DSD MULTI DIRECT STEREO EXT IN MULTI CH IN WIDE SCREEN DOLBY PRO LOGIC Hz DOLBY PRO LOGIC Ix DOLBY PRO LOGIC II DTS 6 DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL Plus DOLBY TrueHD DTS SURROUND DTS 96 24 DTS HD DTS EXPRESS neural MULTI CH STEREO SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB CLASSIC CONCERT MONO MOVIE VIDEO GAME MATRIX VIRTUAL Delay Time Front Height X X X X A X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X e ES x ES X lt ES X lt ES Be X lt ES ES ES Bae X lt Be X lt E3 E3 ESO X Signal Adjustable X No signal Not adjustable NOTE5 BASS 6 dB TREBLE 0 dB X X X X X X X X X X NOTE6 BASS 6 dB TREBLE 4 dB PRO LOGIC II IIx MUSIC mode only Vee ee EXT IN only mode only X ES x ES ES E X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ES X ES X ES XE X ES X ES ES EJ X lt
63. 21972 P Panasonic 20229 Axion 11937 Durabrand 10171 10178 Video Concepts 20045 Voodoo 21972 Philips 20029 B Bang 8 Olufsen 10565 Dynatech 10217 Videomagic 20037 Z ZI Group 21972 Pioneer 20027 20099 20220 Barco 10556 Dynex 11463 Videosonic 20240 Polk Audio 20029 Basic Line 10009 10218 E Eaton 10060 Viewsonic 21972 EIE R RCA 20027 20220 Beaumark 10017 10030 10178 Electroband 10000 Voodoo 21972 Digital Personal Video Recorder S sou 20009 20029 Beko 10714 10715 Seer mE 20037 20042 20043 20045 i inati Son 20170 20243 20291 Belcor 10030 W Wards au aoa Satellite Combination sa an M ee equ m 10000 10020 10073 10150 Wharfedale 20593 B Bell ExpressVu 00775 Technics 20229 BenQ 11032 Flite 10218 UNE 20278 D DirecTV ee Elta 10009 10264 Westinghouse 01142 01377 01442 20739 Technovox 20229 Blue Sky 10556 X xR 1000 20240 Dish Network System 00775 01505 V Victor 20273 Boots 10217 Emerald 10178 Z Zenith 20037 20278 21137 Dishpro 00775 01505 W Wards 20027 Brionvega 10362 A E ZT Group 21972 E Echostar 00775 01505 Y Yamaha 20094 20097 Brockwood 10030 10178 Ese 10178 10195 10623 11394 11911 11944 Expressvu 00775 Broksonic 11911 TIE Encross 10876 EA Hughes Network Bar Broth 10264 Digital Personal Video systems Television a Envision 10030 10813 Recorder M Motorola 00859 A Mark 10047 10054 TET TETT ESA 10171 10812 11944 A ABS 21972 Philips ocr AR Systems 10352 10556 C Candle 10030 F Fergus
64. 4810CI from your PC the Web browser Wired LAN Internet To WAN side To LAN port To LAN port LAN port Ethernet connector O OL m VIDEO Ueto SUD Y Pb CB 1 TV 2 DVR S eae OO For connections to the Internet contact an ISP Internet Service Provider or a computer shop os 2 i EX mi ETHERNET DIGITAL isa cui ZOVA ZONES SW AC OUTLETS d Wireless LAN Internet Computer To WAN side NH 2020210 Router with access point MONITOR NE RI Len gro I 100 0 Oo 9 9 95 9 9 B E AAAAAAA AC OUTLETS ee Required system 1 Broadband Internet connection 1 Modem 21 Router e When using the AVR 4810Cl we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions Built in DHCP server This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN Built in 100BASE TX switch When connecting multiple devices we recommend a switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater e When using with a wireless LAN prepare a broadband router with built in access point _ Ethernet cable CAT 5 or greater recommended Use for wired LAN Some flat type
65. 4810CI so that the power is automatically switched to standby after the set amount of time has passed This is convenient for playing sources while going to sleep Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set The indicator on the display lights e The time switches as shown below each time SLEEP is pressed OFF 120min 90 ONSE 60min 1 To cancel the sleep timer Press SLEEP to set OFF The indicator on the display turns off e The sleep timer setting is canceled if the AVR 4810Cl s power is set to standby or turned off e The sleep timer function can be set separately for the different zones I page 107 Sleep Timer Function Convenient Functions Setting the Power to Standby After a Adjust the Volume of the Speakers You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback sources or to suit your taste as described below Adjust the Volume of the Different Speakers 1 Press CHANNEL LEVEL 2 Use A V to select the speaker The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the buttons is pressed 3 Use lt gt to adjust the volume X In the case of a subwoofer press lt when it is at 12 dB will change the setting to OFF When headphone Jack is inserted the headphone channel level be adjusted Adjusting the Volume of Groups of Speakers Fader Function This function lets you adjust fade the sound from a
66. 85 L Stopping playback temporarily 2 page 85 L Selecting tracks iz page 85 21 Playing repeatedly iz page 86 2 Playing in random order iz page 86 L Searching pages iz page 86 L Searching by first letter iz page 86 e default the front panel s USB port will be used e Depending on the size of the still picture JPEG file some time may be required for the Tile to be displayed e During playback of still picture JPEG files the files can also be switched using TU A previous file and TU V next file e f the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions only the top partition can be selected e The AVR 4810CI is compatible with MP3 files conforming to MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 standards e When USB on the sub remote control unit is pressed playback starts from the first file stored on the USB memory device e The AVR 4810Cl is equipped with two USB ports one each on the front and rear panels It is not possible to use the set with USB memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time Select the USB port you want to use at USB Select Iz amp page 62 e DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or damage to data on USB memory devices when using the USB memory device connected to the AVR 4810CI e USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub eDENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power When using a portable USB co
67. Assign I page 60 Setting items Repeat All Repeat all songs Make settings for repeat One Repeat the current song mode OFF Cancel repeat mode Setting contents Shuffle Songs Shuffle all songs Make settings for shuffle Albums Shuffle songs from current album only mode OFF Cancel shuffle mode Setting the NET USB Playback Mode Playback Mode Default settings are underlined This can be set when the input source is NET USB Setting items Setting contents USB Select Front Select front panel port Set the USB port to be Rear Select rear panel port used Direct Play Favorites Play songs registered as Favorites Use DIRECT PLAY on the All Music Play the songs saved on the PC media sub remote control unit to set the folder to be played Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu Making the Input Settings Source Select Setting the Media Server USB iPod Napster and GUI Automatically Presetting Radio Stations GUI Rhapsody Playback Mode Playback Mode This can be set when the input source 15 Rhapsody Auto Preset Default settings are underlined Setting items Setting contents Setting items Setting contents Repeat All Repeat all files Start This can be set when the input source is HD Radio TUNER Make settings for repeat One Repeat the current file Start the auto preset
68. Friendly Name Edit I page 50 as desired so that it is easily distinguishable from other devices e When playback is started from the mobile terminal device the AVR 4810Cl s input source automatically switches to NET USB Also when the Network Standby setting I page 50 is set to ON the power automatically turns on When operations related to browsing or playback play stop pause track search are performed on the AVR 4810Cl while operating the mobile terminal device the connection to the network is disconnected The network connection is also disconnected when the party mode is started Convenient Functions Operating the AVR 4810Cl with a Browser Web Control Function You can operate the AVR 4810CI using a browser Switch ON the Network Standby setting I page 50 2 Check the AVR 4810CI s IP address with Network Information 1257 page 51 t gt NETWORK INFO DENON Friendly Name DENON AVR 481 OCI Network DHCP IP Address Mac Address 0005cd004023 Checking the IP address Return Enter the AVR 4810CI IP address in browser s address box Forexample ifthe Paddress of AVR 481 0Clis 192 168 100 33 enter http 192 168 100 33 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help INDEX DENON Web Controller AVR 4810CI MainZone Control Zone2 Control Zone3 Control Zone4 Control 1 Entering the IP address When the to
69. MAIN ZONE ON q MAIN ZONE OFF VOLUME b INPUT SOURCE i SELECT MAIN ibe QUICK e SELECT 2 SELE CT ZONE ON SLEEP EE MAIN r ZONE ON Q7 IM ZONE CALL Sub remote control unit Playback The operating procedure is the same for Zone Playback by Speaker Output and 2 Zone Playback by Audio Output PRE OUT Turn on the AVR 4810CT s power I page 28 Turning the Power On 2 Turn on the zone power Press ZONE2 ON OFF ZONE3 ON OFF or lt ZONE4 ON OFF gt for the zone to be operated When the power turns on the ZB or IZ W indicator lights on the display Press MAIN to display the mode for the zone to be operated the press ZONE ON When the power turns on the EA or IZW indicator lights on the display X Also press INPUT SOURCE SELECT when in standby mode the power turns on When using ZONE2 ZONES or ZONEA it 15 possible to turn the power for the MAIN ZONE only on or off by pressing MAIN ZONE ON or MAIN ZONE OFF 3 Select the input source D Press lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT and select the zone to be adjusted 2 Turn SOURCE SELECT to choose the input source Operation on the remote control unit In the zone mode you want to operate press INPUT SOURCE SELECT X The same input source as in the main zone can be selected easily by pressing the M ZONE CALL on the sub r
70. MODE to select MANUAL then use TU A or TU V 5 Adjust the items below 1 Adjusting the master volume t amp page 85 J Selecting the surround mode iz page 87 J Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality I page 90 e f the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning tune it in manually e When tuning in stations manually press and hold TU A or TU V to change frequencies continuously e he time default 30 sec for which the GUI menu is displayed can be set GUI Tuner page 54 Press AV 1 D to return to the original screen Selecting Audio Programs HD Radio Technology enables stations to broadcast multiple Audio programs and data services on HD2 HD3 channels Press A V to select the audio program If the station you are listening to has multiple audio programs HD1 is indicated on the display If it only has one audio program HD Is indicated Presetting Radio Stations Preset Memory Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily Up to 56 stations can be preset 1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset 2 Press MEMO Press A G to select the block in which the channel is to be preset then press CHANNEL or 1 8 to select the preset number The memory block can also be selected by pressing SHIFT on the sub remote control unit 4 Press MEMO again to complete the setting preset other stati
71. Matrix 6 1 DTS ES Matrix 6 1 is a 6 1 channel discrete digital audio format inserting a surround back SB channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding Decoding of conventional 5 1 channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder DTS NEO 6 Surround DIS NEO 6 is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6 1 channel surround playback with 2 channel sources It includes DTS NEO 6 Cinema suited for playing movies and DTS NEO 6 Music suited for playing music Explanation of Terms DTS 96 24 DTS 96 24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5 1 channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD Video DTS Express DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates max 5 1 channels 24 to 256 kbps Manufactured under license under U S Patent s 5 451 942 5 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 226 616 6 487 535 7 212 872 7 333 929 7 392 195 7 272 567 amp other U S and worldwide patents issued amp pending DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos Symbol DTS HD and DTS HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS Inc 1996 2008 DTS Inc All Rights Reserved Neural Surround Neural Surround a breakthrough in audio technology will bring the excitement of surround music to more of America s listening audience It provides the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a format 100 c
72. OFF Do not use i p scaler function This can be set when Video Convert is set to ON e Analog amp can be set for input sources for which an HDMI input terminal is assigned e This function is not effective when the input signal is x v Color or computer resolution Resolution Set resolution of the video signal output to HDMI Auto he number of pixels the TV connected to the HDMI output terminal supports is detected automatically and the appropriate output resolution is set 480p 576p 10801 720p 1080 1080p 24Hz Set the output resolution e This can be set when i p Scaler is set to anything other than OFF e When i p Scaler is set to Analog amp HDMI the resolution of both the analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set e o watch 1080p 24Hz pictures use a TV that supports 1080p 24Hz video signals e When set to 1080p 24Hz you can enjoy film like pictures for film sources in 24 Hz For video sources and mixed sources we recommend setting the resolution to 1080p e t is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p 24Hz It is output at a resolution of 1080p 50Hz Changing the Input Mode and Decoding Mode Input Mode Default settings are underlined The selectable input modes depend on the input source and Input Assign I page 58 setting Setting items Input Mode Set the audio input modes f
73. OM OR OR OO x O Signal Adjustable X No signal Not adjustable x00000000000000000000000x00xx Channel output xO00000000000000000x0x000x00xx Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting NOTE1 This parameter is availabe when the NOTE2 This parameter is availabe when the NOTE3 This parameter is availabe when the NOTEA This parameter is availabe when the NOTE 1 When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals 2 When playing Dolby TrueHD signal 3 When playing Dolby Digital DTS DVD Audio and Super Audio CD o00000000O0O00Oo0oooooooooooooooxQ P x00000000 Mode is set to Cinema Mode is set to Cinema or ProLogic IZ page 90 Front Height is set to ON or DSX is set to ON DSX is set to ON Signals and adjustability in the different modes Front Height L R x0o00000000 I page 90 I page 93 4 When the Subwoofer Mode is set to LFE Main I page 42 only Parameter default values are shown in parentheses IA mE O 89 mn EM 55 w RIT ER E es ea TI JT gt gt El C ot EM BEC gt I B t EM oO E O gt pes bes els T gt IZ page 91 93 6 X X X X X E 2
74. R channels and red and black polarities on the speakers being connected to the AVR 4810Cl and Even if there are no problems with the surrounding ventilation and be sure to Interconnect the channels and polarities correctly connections in the event of the protection circuit becoming activated due to thinking that the AVR 4810CI has failed please contact DENON Peel off about 0 03 ft 10 mm of sheathing Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to Service center after switching off from the tip of the speaker cable then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it tighten it Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it Insert the speaker cable s core wire to the hilt into the speaker terminal S t 16 Connecting Devices Connecting Devices Equipped with Connections 4 H The AVR 4810CI allows connection of inputs from up to 6 HDMI HDMI Terminals devices and output to 2 monitors Important Information wu Connecting Devices DVD Satellite Ll i LI A HDMI HD player i cassette video player recorder recorder 4 Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI HDMI is the abbreviation of High Definition Multimedia Terminals 1 page 17 Interface This interface allows transfer of digital video signals and JJ Connecting the Monitor iz amp page 18 digital audio signals over a single HDMI cable 1 Connecting the Playback Components HDMI
75. Remote mode Browse mode Display mode Audio file Picture file Playable files Movie file Main remote Active control unit buttons AVR 4810CI iPod Only the sound is played Use A V to select the item then press ENTER or to select the file to be played 7 Press ENTER gt or gt Playback starts Playing Components Adjust the items below 1 Adjusting the master volume I amp page 85 2 Selecting the surround mode iz page 87 21 Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality IS page 90 2 To stop t amp page 85 L Stopping playback temporarily 2 page 85 L Fast forwarding or fast reversing iz page 85 L To cue to the beginning of a track rz page 85 J Playing repeatedly iz page 86 2 Playing in random order iz page 86 L Searching pages iz page 86 e Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound I page 94 The default setting is Mode 3 e The title name artist name and album name can be checked by pressing STATUS during playback e he time default 30 sec for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI iPod 54 Press AV 1 gt to return to the original screen e Depending on the type of iPod and the software version some functions may not operate e DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPo
76. SELECTOR MACRO SS 1 MAIN mia gt 0 9 E RC SETUP 114 MACRO Function his function lets you register a series of operations at a single button For example the amplifier can be turned on the input source selected the monitor s power turned on the source device s power turned on and the play mode set all by pressing a single button Up to 32 signals each can be registered at MACRO 1 3 Registering Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 8 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the system call registration mode is set 3 Press MACRO 1 3 at which you want to register the signals 4 Press the buttons you want to register in the same sequence as the operations you want to perform The signal transmission indicator lights when a button is pressed Example Press POWER ON 4 Press DEVICE SELECTOR DVD HDP Y Press gt The mode can be switched by pressing DEVICE SELECTOR X Perform the registration procedure for all the buttons you want to register Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting Is completed Registration is not possible in ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 and MACRO modes Calling out 1 Press MAIN to select MACRO 2 Press MAC
77. Stored on a Computer 2 e When playing still picture JPEG files files can also be selected using the operation described below During playback either press TU previous file or TU V next file e Connections to the required system and specific settings must be made in order to play music files 87 page 26 e Before starting you must launch the computer s server software and set the files as server contents For details see the operating instructions of your server software e Depending on the size of the still picture JPEG file some time may be required for the file to be displayed e he order in which the tracks files are displayed depends on the server specifications If due to the server specifications the tracks files are not displayed in alphabetical order searching by the first letter may not work properly e WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting transcoding such as Windows Media Player Ver 11 e Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound page 94 The default setting is Mode 3 e he time default 30 sec for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI NET USB rz amp page 53 e Use STATUS to switch between displaying the title name artist name or album name Playing files that have been Preset or Registered in Your Favorites Files can be preset registered in your f
78. This can be set when Party Mode Function is set to ON e This is displayed from to 99 when Volume Display IG page 53 is set to Absolute e You can set to the upper limit set with Volume Limit I page 53 Setting items Rhapsody Account Setting contents Username Password Set or change Username types of characters that can be input are as shown below and Password I28 page 83 Listening to Rhapsody Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Symbols amp lt gt G NM Numbers 0123456789 Space e You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input e The password may not contain underscores _ Network Status Displays up to a maximum of 10 DENON products connected on the same network e Friendly Name Model Name Power ON Standby Select Source Volume Level Party Mode status A Network Status is only displayed for DENON products supporting the Network Status function Update Notification Displays a notification message on the AVR 4810Cl s GUI screen when the latest firmware is released with Firmware Update The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the power is turned on Connect to broadband Internet I 26 when using this function e ON Display update me
79. X X Q X Q X M DIRECT PLIIx CINEMA X P X X X xX x x x x x PA X X x Q X x M DIRECT PLIIx MUSIC X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Q X Q X M DIRECT DOLBY EX X x x x x X x x X S X x x X AX X X Q X Q X M DIRECT 71 x x x X x x x x X x x x x x x O 71 x PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT O 8 O v x x PURE DIRECT x x x x x x x x x x x X X X X X X X X DSD MULTI PURE DIRECT x x x x x x x X x x x x x x x x x x x O x cy MULCH PURE DIREC x x x x PX X X X X X X X x x x x x X x PURE D PLIIx CINEMA X x x X x X x x x X x x x x x x x O x O x o M PURE D PLIIx MUSIC X X X X X X X X X X X X X x x x X X lt M PURE D DOLBY EX x x x x x x x x x x x xX xX x x x x x VIER PURE BIREGI 71 x x x x x x X X X xX x X X X X x QU X X NOTE Mode selectable in initial status 1 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to None O Selectable mode 2 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to 1spkr or None X Non selectable mode 3 This mode is not available when the front height speaker setup is set to None 127 unoousoe qnoJ f ds 2 IIJ sSuo0I e3 Surround Mode DSP SIMULATION DH EIECTUS WIDE SCREEN SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB CLASSIC CONCERT MONO MOVIE 128 Note OR OR OR LINEAR AN
80. Xe S VIDEO S VIDEO X S VIDEO 2 X S VIDEO 2 EN Q HDMI HDMI ON O X x x X x72 X 2 ue X COMPONENT 2 EY Bat ON O T S VIDEO S VIDEO X S VIDEO 2 X S VIDEO 2 OFF x X x x VIDEO OFF x x Q x x x OFF X X n VIDEO OFF x Q x x x X o OFF x x e VIDEO OFF x x COMPONENT um OFF x VIDEO OFF x x x x x Only the GUI menu is displayed OFF x x x VIDEO OFF O X O x VIDED x OFF Q x HDMI VIDEO OFF Q Q x x x OFF Q x VIDEO OFF COMPONENT Me OFF O O VIDEO O signal input present Superimposed on the picture indicated in X video signal input X Only the picture in is output 1 When no HDMI monitor is connected or the HDMI monitor s power is not on X Neither the picture nor the GUI menu is output 2 Only the GUI menu is displayed when no HDMI monitor is connected or the HDMI ZONE2 MONITOR OUT monitor s power is not on INPUT OUTPUT 3 On screen display COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO m e The main zone video conversion function is compatible with the following formats X X X x x Only the OSD menu is displayed NTSC PAL SECAM NTSC4 43 PAL M and PAL 60 x x Q x VIDEO VIDEO e When SECAM signals of video input are up converted the signals are output in xX x lt S VIDEO S VIDEO PAL format from the S Video and Video connectors x
81. are as shown below Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Symbols amp lt gt 7 Numbers 0123456789 Space 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to change the display name Setting items Trigger Out 1 Select the condition for activating Trigger Out 1 for the input source surround mode etc See TRIGGER OUT jacks Zone Rename Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer 1 Use AV to select the zone name MAIN ZONE ZONE2 ZONE3 or ZONEA4 you want to change then press gt or ENTER 2 Use lt gt to set the cursor to the character you want to change 3 Use AV to change the character then press ENTER e Up to 10 characters can be input e You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input e The types of characters that can be input are as shown below Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Symbols amp lt gt 7 Numbers 0123456789 Space 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to change the display name Is page 26 for more information on trigger out Trigger Out 2 As with Trigger Out 1 select the condition for activating Trigger Out 2 Setting contents When Setting for Zone MAIN ZONE ZONE2 ZONES ZONE4 Trigger out is activated through linkag
82. aron Conic 10178 Mind 21972 Alba 10009 10037 10073 10163 Craig 10171 Granada 10037 10218 10352 10371 ges ai LS 10572 m 10171 ie d es 10872 10693 10706 Lus rs e ec d Northgate 21872 p Alleron 10030 10170 Crown 10672 Grundy 10195 P Panasonic 20614 20616 Aiwa 20029 20197 20200 Ee 10150 Crown Mustang 10672 H Haier 11749 PRESET CODE Hallmark Hanseatic Harley Davidson Harman Kardon Harsper Heathkit Helios Hewlett Packard Hikone Hitachi HP Hyundai ICE Ima Infinity InFocus Innova Insignia Inteq ITT Nokia IX JBL JCB Jensen JIL Jinxing Johnson Jutan JVC Kamp Kawasho KDS KEC Kennex Kenwood Kioto KLH Kloss Konka Kreisen KTV Lark LG Lloyd s Loewe Logik 10178 10556 10000 11904 10054 11206 10017 10865 11494 10218 10000 10047 10145 11643 11494 10849 10264 10178 10054 11164 10037 10171 10017 10070 10877 10054 10000 10761 10030 10037 10455 10030 10030 10070 10731 10017 10030 11498 10060 10668 10030 10556 10156 10030 10218 10876 10030 10154 10017 10060 11423 10030 10512 10011 10030 10017 10051 10163 11904 10865 11423 10145 10163 100998 10556 10036 10371 11253 10217 10765 10371 10217 10030 10178 11637 11904 10633 10060 10178 10035 10036 10054 10109 PNAS 1 1576 11960 115
83. assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi Fi Alliance a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices _J IEEE 802 116 This is one wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers of the United States It uses the 2 4 GHz band usable freely without a radio frequency license ISM band enabling communications at a maximum speed of 11 Mbps d The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the wireless LAN standard and does not indicate the actual data transfer rate IEEE 802 119 This is another wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers of the United States and is compatible with IEEE 802 11b It also uses the 2 4 GHz band but enables communications at a maximum speed of 54 Mbps I The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the wireless LAN standard and does not indicate the actual data transfer rate L Infrastructure Communications Infrastructure Communications refers to networks using wireless LAN access points This function can be used to connect to the Internet or a wired LAN via a wireless LAN access point Wireless LAN access points include wireless broadband routers Network Names SSID Security Set Identifier When forming
84. be listened to e Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an exclusive DENON Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a computer X The function is managed for individual users so you must provide your MAC or e mail address Exclusive URL http www radiodenon com X The radio station database service may be suspended without notice e The AVR 4810Cl s Internet radio station list is created using radio station database service vTuner This database service provides a list edited and created for the AVR 4810CI Media Player This function lets you play music files and playlists m3u wpl stored on a computer media server connected to the AVR 4810CI via a network With the AVR 4810Cl s network audio playback function connection to the server is possible using one of the technologies below e Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service e Windows Media DRM10 _J Album Art Function When a WMA Windows Media Audio MP3 or MPEG 4 AAC file includes album art data the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing For music files in WMA Windows Media Audio format the album art is only played when using Windows Media Player ver 11 Slide Show Function Still picture JPEG files stored in folders on a media server can be played as slide shows The time for which each picture Is displayed can be set The AVR 4810CI plays back image JPEG files in the orientation in whic
85. contents Setting items Network Connecting Proxy settings Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a Network Connecting Continued proxy Server Continued e 2 NETWORK CONNECTING DHCP ON IP Address 192 Subnet Mask 255 Default Gateway 192 Primary DNS 192 Secondary DNS 000 DHCP ON IP Address 192 168 100 33 Exit o e gt Set IP address and proxy manually Set if using proxy server gt NETWORK CONNCTING Proxy lt gt Proxy O Adaress Address 000 000 000 000 Port 6 Exit 4 Cancel Proxy server is used L gt NETWORK CONNCTING 168 2255 WE 168 168 000 Proxy e Enter Setting contents Use AV D to input the proxy server port number and press ENTER 7 Use V to select Exit and press ENTER Setup is complete Other Network function on off setting during standby and PC language setting Cance D Onthe GUI menu select Network Connecting Detail or Manual and press ENTER 2 Use AV to set Proxy and press ENTER 3 Use lt D to set Proxy to ON and press The proxy server is enabled 4 Use 1 D to select the proxy server input method and then press Address Select when inputting by address Name Select when inputting by domain name 5 Use AV lt D to input the proxy server address or domain name press ENTER When
86. d AC OUTLETS Bo SWITCHED 120V 60 OTAL Al S BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE and F HEIGHT F WIDE speaker terminals Use when connecting surround back speakers front height speakers or front wide spekars Front height speakers or Front wide speakers 2 Speaker connections Surround back speakers Front height speakers or Front wide speakers 8 S BACK FHEIGHT FWIDE 8 G FHEIGHT F WIDE 8 1 Relationship between Amp Assign settings and channels output by each speaker terminal Amp Assign setting I page 39 41 Extra F HEIGHT Channel F WIDE FWIDE serm S BACK E HEIGEIT Channels output by each speaker terminal 9 Tch S BACK F WIDE S BACK Tid S8 SBAK FH EN FtWbE o e X Use the PRE OUT terminal for the front wide channel output 7 ZONE2 and ZONES speaker terminals Use when installing multi zone speakers or dedicated 2 channel speakers 1 Connecting speakers for multi zone ZONE2 ZONE3 1 Speaker connections 1 Relationship between Amp Assign settings and channels output by each speaker terminal Amp Assign setting 1257 page 39 41 Assign Mode Channels output by each spe
87. default Friendly Name on first use is DENON AVR 4810CI The types of characters that can be input are as shown below Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Symbols 1 amp lt gt QG M Numbers 0123456789 Space You can change the character tyoe when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input Default Reset all settings to factory default e Yes Reset to the defaults e No Do not reset to the defaults Party Mode Function Set the Party Mode function e OFF Disable Party Mode function e ON Enable Party Mode function Refer to page 101 Playing the Same Network Audio on Different Devices Connected in a Network Party Mode Function for more information on the party mode function RCH 50 Main remote control unit Displaying the menu Moves the cursor Cancel the menu operation buttons Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu Setting items Other Continued Setting contents Party Start Level Make settings for volume level when the Party Mode Is started e Last The same volume as set before the party mode was started e 0 Always use the muting on condition when the Party Mode is started e 80dB 18dB 1 99 Start party mode with your preferred volume e
88. e Do not remove the setup microphone until Audyssey Auto Setup is completed e When using headphones unplug the headphones before starting Audyssey Auto Setup Check the speaker connections Iz amp page 14 Speaker Connections Turn on the TV and subwoofer power Change the TV input to AVR 4810CI input Turn on the AVR 4810CI power 3 I page 28 Turning the Power On 4 Connect the setup microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of the AVR 4810CI Sound o OB receptor Audyssey Auto Setup screen is displayed when you connect the setup microphone DENON 4123456 kers and place them according nendations in the manual set the following Items if necessary Amp Assign Channel Skip 5 Mount the setup microphone on a tripod or stand and place it in the main listening position When placing the setup microphone adjust the height of the sound receiver part to the level of the listener s ear If you subwoofer provides volume and crossover settings set these as shown below before starting Audyssey Auto Setup e Volume setting 12 o clock position or the middle of the gain knob s range e ow path filter setting is Off or Crossover Frequency setting is Maximum Highest Frequency e Phase setting 0 e Standby mode setting Off e f you connect two or three subwoofers the best results will be achieved when e Subwoofers are placed at equal distances from the mai
89. information or track then press ENTER or gt After selecting the information is displayed Track Menu Press during playback to display the Track Menu Introduction 1 6 DENON 1 68 Jamp to artist Jamp to album I Similar artists 5 d Similar albums il Add to my library 1 Search From the Similar Music Use A V to select the search item then press ENTER or D 2 Registering Tracks in My Library Use AV to select Add to My Library then press ENTER or P The track is entered in the Library 3 Rating Function 1 Use A V to select Rating then press ENTER or gt 2 Use lt gt to select the rating then press ENTER e Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound The default setting is Mode 3 157 page 94 e The time default 30 sec for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI NET USB 187 page 53 e Use STATUS to switch between displaying the title name artist name or album name Adjusting the Master Volume Use MASTER VOLUME to adjust the volume When the Volume Display setting 125 page 53 is Relative Adjustable range 80 5dB 18 0dB _1 When the Volume Display setting IG page 53 is Absolute Adjustable range 0 0 99 0 X The adjustable range depends on the input signal the channel level settings etc
90. manual for details Q3 gt NETWORK CONNECTING DENON Select connection method appropriate for your wireless LAN host Manual Set using the WPS functio w gt NETWORK CONNECTING DENON Select whether to connect with the push button or PIN code method Push button 4 Enter Cancel Connect to network with the PIN code method D Select WPS and press ENTER 2 Select PIN Code and press ENTER D Select WPS and press ENTER 2 Select Push Button and press ENTER Main remote control unit operation buttons SEARCH Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Displaying the menu Cancel the menu See overleaf Confirm the setting Return to previous menu 47 B PTS DT EIE LES Setting items Network Connecting Continued o e c gt The access point is displayed Setting contents Setting items Network Connecting Continued re gt q NETWORK CONNECTING Please select access point to connect DENON WEP Search Enter Cancel Select access point to connect 3 Use A V to select the access point and press ENTER PIN code number is displayed e gt NETWORK CONNECTING Enter below PIN code in the registrar to start the registrar Current PIN code PIN code Waiting for connection Set the PIN code displayed on the GUI screen to registrar When connection is established with acces
91. measurements MultEQ XT calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs a fully automated surround system setup Audyssey Dynamic EQ Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ XT to provide well balanced sound for every listener at any volume level Audyssey Dynamic Volume Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs commercials and between the soft and loud passages of movies Audyssey Dynamic is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically the perceived bass response tonal balance surround impression and dialog clarity remain the same Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion DSX Realistic reproduction of sound relies on the ability of audio systems to match human hearing performance Three key requirements are i frequency response 2 dynamic range and 3 accurate spatial reproduction The requirements for frequency response have already been surpassed with sampling rates that exceed human hearing The dynamic range limits of human perception have also been met with current digital audio systems operating capable of signal to noise ratios that approach 120
92. menu 13 The currently selected input source _J Icon is highlighted Switch the selected item Use A to switch Switch to the next item Use gt or ENTER to switch Selected item Switch the selected item L List SOURCE SELECT Move amp Enter Radio Use V to switch is displayed when using a Control dock for iPod Switch to the next item Use gt or ENTER to switch Selected item X Switch the selected Item using AV Input Assign Video Input Mode Rename Source Level D Input Source The name of the highlighted input source is displayed 2 Recently used sources The recently used input sources up to 5 are displayed 3 Icons for the input sources in the different categories are displayed video F sarceo R 5 vcr ER ovn V AUX Player PHONO Network Favorites Internet Radio Media Server 8 USB iPod lt Napster Rhapsody BB xm fes SIRIUS foe HD Radio TUNER Use AV lt gt to select the input source icon then press ENTER The input source 15 set and the source selection menu is turned off Tuner e Use the device selection buttons on the main remote control unit to set the device to be operated beforehand e When using with an iPod connected directly to the AVR 4810Cl s USB pot select USB iPod for the input source
93. output to DVI D devices that do not support ENE ME eo e SY iDP TV SAT CBL VCR Pod DVR VCR DVR ZONE3 70 TUNER FM DVR 20 _ ZONE2 a me B Wi oB Amp 8 m HDCP ANTENNA 738 m REMOTE CONTROLY Y DOCK contROL e Depending on the combination of devices the video signals may not be output a SAT CBL Scd 3 CD HDP TV E DVR LI pong Yo E i Settings Related to HDMI Connections m IEEE ae T P Re y Set as necessary For details see the respective reference pages Z Z m Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is assigned Input Assign 1257 page 58 J Input Assign t amp page 58 Set this to change the HDMI input terminal to which the input source Is assigned Owws me r the case of HD audio Dolby TrueHD DTS HD and Dolby Digital Plus and DTS Express audio playback connect with HDMI Ie page 17 Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals VOR DVK zones 9 hi i oRi Amn fM Bow m ems 18 SURROUND To listen to TV audio through this device use the optical digital or analog connection 18 Connecting Devices Control Dock for iPod CD Player Record Player Use a DENON control dock for iPod ASD 1R or ASD 11R sold Select the terminal to use and connect the device separate
94. playback The signals are decoded in DIS NEO 6 for playback DOLBY PLIIx 2 DOLBY PLII DTS NEO 6 It is possible to play analog input signals and PCM 2 channel 48 kHz or less in the surround mode This is the optimum mode for playing sources recorded in XM HD Surround 87 page 121 neural 1 This can be set when Amp Assign Extra Channel is set to FH and Speaker Configuration Front Height is set to something other than None 2 This can be set when Amp Assign Extra Channel is set to SB and Speaker Configuration Surround Back is set to something other than None 2 Select the mode for the source at Mode IG page 90 Cinema his mode is suited for movie sources Music his mode is suited for music sources Game This mode is suited for games Pro Logic his is the Pro Logic playback mode This can be selected when playing with a DOLBY PLII Height decoder his is the Front Height playback mode Set Front Height to ON IP page 91 X The modes that can be selected depend on the input source being played L Surround Playback of Multi channel Sources Dolby Digital DTS etc In the case of standard playback of multi channel sources the AVR 4810Cl recognizes the format of the multi channel audio input signal and automatically operates the appropriate decoder for surround sound Displaying the Currently Playing Surround Mode The indicati
95. pvo sar cet ver pvr VAUX input sources set this to change the are assigned to the component video input terminals as shown below component video input terminals assigned to the 1 RCA Component video 1 2 RCA Component video 2 3 RCA Component video 3 None Do not assign a component video input terminal to the selected input source input sources X Upon purchase the settings of the different input sources are as shown below setting e An input source to which a component video input terminal cannot be assigned is displayed as e When control dock for iPod is used as the input source assignment of the component video input terminal is disabled even if it is assigned Main remote control unit operation buttons ROH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu awk h Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right See overleaf Confirm the setting Return to previous menu 59 o e gt 7 o e gt 7 Setting items iPod dock Assign the control dock for IPod input Setting contents The control dock for iPod can be assigned to the input sources Assign Assign the control dock for iPod to the selected input source None Do not assign the control dock for iPod to the selected input source e By default on first use it is assigned VCR iPod e An input source to which control dock f
96. speaker size Making the HDMI Settings HDMI Setup PISTES T EST EST COT MO LES HET ES EST Default settings are underlined Make settings for HDMI video audio output Setting items Setting contents RGB Range Normal Output with RGB video range 16 black to 235 white Set the video range of RGB Enhanced Output with RGB video range 0 black to 255 white output from the HDMI terminal A This setting is valid when using a TV equipped with a DVI terminal Vertical Stretch ON Expand image signal in vertical direction Expand image signal in OFF Do not expand signal in vertical direction vertical direction Auto Lip Sync Automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video output A This setting is valid with respect to the HDMI output when using an HDMI compatible TV When not using an HDMlI compatible TV it is valid with respect to the analog output ON Compensated OFF Not compensated Speaker Impedance Set the impedance of connected speakers 80 ohms Select when the impedance of the connected speaker is 8 O ohms or more 60 ohms Select when the impedance of the connected speaker is at least 6 O ohms but less than 8 O ohms Check the speaker impedance shown on the back of your speakers or in the instruction manual beforehand Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu HDMI Audio Out Select HDMI
97. standby power e The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is compatible with the HDMI control function Make sure that the TV and HDMI are connected when you perform HDMI control e When you power off AVR 4810CI the HDMI control function does not operate Either power on or set to standby e Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player Check the owner s manual of each device for details beforehand Please refer to the DENON website for information on compatible equipment e When Control is set to ON itis not possible to assign an HDMI terminal to TV at Input Assign I page 59 Turn the power on for all the equipment connected by HDMI cable Set the HDMI control function for all equipment connected by HDMI cable Set HDMI Control Control 87 page 44 to ON X Please consult the operating instructions for the connected equipment to check the settings X Carryout steps 1 and 2 should any of the equipment be plugged Out Switch the television input to the HDMI connected to the AVR 4810CI 4 Switch the AVR 4810CI input to the HDMI input source and check if the picture from the player is ok When you turn the TV s power to standby check that the power of the AVR 4810CI and player also goes on standby If the HDMI control function does operate properly check the following points e 5 the TV or player compatible with the HDMI control
98. subwoofer Setting items Distance Set distance from listening position to speakers Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each speaker Setting contents Feet Meters Set the unit of distance Step Set the minimum variable width of the distance e 1ft 0 1ft e 0 1m 0 01m Default Reset all distance settings to factory default e Yes Reset to the defaults No Do not reset to the defaults Nhen you select Default and press ENTER the Return all settings to the default prompt is displayed Select either Yes or No and press ENTER Front L Front R Center Subwoofer Surround A L Surround AR Surround B L Surround B Back L Surr Back Front Height L Front Height R Front Wide L Front Wide R Select the speaker When the Speaker Configuration Surround Back setting I page 41 is set to 1spkr Surr Back is displayed e 0 0ft 60 0ft 0 00m 18 00m Set the distance e Speakers set to None in Speaker Configuration 187 page 41 are not displayed e The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the Amp Assign e page 41 and Speaker Configuration I page 41 settings e Default settings Front Center Subwoofer Front Height Front Wide 12 0 ft 8 60 m Surround A Surround B Surround Back 10 0 ft 3 00 m e Set the difference in the distance between the speakers
99. the HDMI connectors e Select the input source assigned to the HDMI terminal at HDMI e Connect a monitor that is compatible with copyright protection HDCP e Check that the output format HDMI FORMAT of the connected player etc matches the TV s compatible input formats e Depending on the monitor you have connected the display may not be correct when you set to Auto Dual In such a case set to either Monitor 1 or Monitor 2 e Set HDMI Audio Out to TV to output HDMI audio signals from the TV e Set HDMI Control Control to OFF When you only want to operate the power on off each device set Power Off Control to OFF 131 o gt 5 Buljooysajqnoiy NET USB Rhapsody Napster Symptom Cause Countermeasure When a USB memory device is connected USB tS Bot displayed on the GUI menu Files on a USB memory device cannot be played The file names are not displayed properly a etc Internet radio cannot be played Files stored on a computer cannot be played 132 e The set cannot recognize a USB memory device Check the connection e A USB memory device not conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards is connected Connect a USB memory device conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards e The set port and the connected port do not match Connect to the port set at USB Select e A USB memory
100. then press ENTER Set the main remote control unit to the NET USB sel mode page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit 4 Use AV to input Username and Password Enter a Character Search For the Track You Want to Listen to 1 Press SEARCH Napster Account 1 7 DENON Search by Artist Search by Albums Search by Track Username Password OK Staff Picks Genres Cancel Enter Username After inputting the Username and Password select OK then press ENTER If the Username and Password match the top menu for Napster is displayed X You can search by artist name album name or track name Use A V to select the search item then press ENTER The search display appears Username Search by Artist Input characters Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Symbols amp lt gt _ Numbers 0123456789 Space Enter Artist Name amp Submit Password Input characters Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 3 Enter the characters then press ENTER Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Symbols amp lt gt 7 Numbers 0123456789 Space Playing Napster Regi ing Tracks in My N Li i i egistering Tracks in apster Librar Listening to Rhapsod
101. to ON when MultEQ XT is set to either OFF or Manual MultEQ XT is automatically set to Audyssey e You can also press MULTEO XT on the main remote control unit to set e MultEO XT and Manual cannot be selected when Customize is set to Not Used I page 45 e When using headphones MultEQ XT is set to OFF 92 Main remote control unit Displaying the menu operation buttons RCH Cancel the menu Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting e OFF Do not use the Dynamic equalizer e After performing Audyssey Auto Setup the Dynamic setting automatically becomes ON is displayed when set to ON DYN EQ eWhen MultEQ XT is set to OFF or Manual Dynamic EQ is automatically set to OFF elf Dynamic Volume is set to ON Dynamic EQ is automatically set to ON e When you set Dynamic EQ to ON Tone Control is switched OPE e You can also press DYNAMIC on the main remote control unit to set Dynamic ON Volume OFF Dynamic EQ Volume OFF poe AUDYSSEY Nf XX Red Ott About Dynamic EQ Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ XT to provide well balanced sound for every listener at any v
102. wireless LAN networks groups are formed to prevent interference data theft etc This grouping is done by SSID or Security Set Identifiers For further security a WEP key is set and signal transfer is not possible unless the SSID and WEP key match L WEP Key Network Key This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data transfer On the AVR 4810CI the same WEP key is used for data encryption and decryption so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for communications to be established between them L1 WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup This is a standard drawn up by the Wi Fi Alliance to ease the task of setting up wireless LAN connections and configuring security Thereare two methods push button and PIN Personal Identification Number code 1 WPA Wi Fi Protected Access This is a security standard established by the Wi Fi Alliance In addition to the conventional SSID network name and WEP key network key it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger security L WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access 2 This is anew version of the WPA established by the Wi Fi Alliance compatible with more secure AES encryption L WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Pre shared Key This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and client 1 Passphrase his refers to the code key used for WPA PSK WPA2 PSK auth
103. 0 1 MHz Direct Frequency Tuning You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in 1 Press SEARCH 2 Input frequencies by means of 0 9 X If lt 1 is pressed the immediately preceding input is cancelled 3 When setting is completed press ENTER The preset frequency is tuned in Listening to XM Satellite Radio When operating XM with the AVR 4810CI via the main remote control unit or sub remote control unit use SAT TU Before operating set to SAT TU operating mode SAT TU of INPUT SOURCE SELECT and SAT TU of DEVICE SELECT mode can use only either XM or SIRIUS The default setting is for SIRIUS operation Set GUI menu Option Setup Remote SIRIUS XM gt page 55 to SAT TU XM 2 Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select I gt page 31 The input source becomes that set in step 1 Set the main remote control unit to the SAT TU mode KS page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit You can then operate the input source you set in step 1 4 Use TU A or TU V to select the channel When the channel is tuned in the name of the song and artist are displayed Adjust the items below 5 1 Adjusting the master volume t amp page 85 J Selecting the surround mode iz page 87 2 Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality page 90 e The channel switches continuously when TU A TU V is pressed and held
104. 0 dB down Volume Display Set how volume IS displayed Relative Display dB Min in the range 80 dB 18 dB Absolute Display in the range Min 99 e The Volume Display setting is applied also to the Volume Level Volume Limit and Power On Level display method e The Volume Display setting applies to all zones 52 Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu Making Other Settings Option Setup GUI OPTION Setting items Volume Control Set the MAIN ZONE volume setting GUI Default settings are underlined Continued Setting contents Volume Display Set how volume is displayed e Relative Display dB Min in the range 80 dB 18 GB e Absolute Display in the range 0 Min 99 e The Volume Display setting is applied also to the Volume Limit and Power On Level display method e The Volume Display setting applies to all zones Volume Limit Make a setting for maximum volume e OFF Do not set a maximum volume 20dB 61 10dB 71 OdB 81 Power On Level Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on e Last Use the memorized setting from the last session e 0 Always use the muting on conditio
105. 036 10178 SI 10150 10166 11156 10047 10704 10176 10178 10163 10017 10037 10054 10166 10054 10035 10051 10154 10802 11866 10556 10855 11454 10036 105527 10145 10178 507 10877 10108 10060 10092 10178 10170 a 11270 11240 11331 11610 10217 10030 10047 10060 10171 10092 10036 10054 10171 11254 11904 Onwa Optimus Optoma Orion Pace Pacific Palsonic Panasonic Panda Pausa Paxonic PCE Penney Petters Philco Philips Pilot Pioneer Polaroid Portland Prima Prism Proscan Protec Proton Proview ProVision Pulsar Pulser Quartz Quasar R Line Rabbit RadioShack RCA Realistic Reoc Revox Rowa 10602 10030 10178 10887 10017 11463 10092 10037 11137 10264 10000 10054 10367 11457 11947 10698 10009 10030 10060 10000 10037 10070 11347 11523 10030 10171 10030 10374 11254 10011 10178 10109 10679 10765 11341 12120 10092 10761 10051 10047 10009 10009 11498 10037 10017 10092 10150 10035 10037 10047 10030 10178 10000 10090 11147 11547 19807 10030 10178 10714 10037 10698 10150 10650 10178 11911 10556 10773 10030 10156 10650 11480 10706 10060 10156 10030 10047 10108 10054 TZ 10037 1
106. 0512 11454 10030 10163 10866 10865 11498 119338 11347 10037 10178 10556 10092 10178 10178 10051 10047 11904 10047 10178 11247 11781 1019589 10047 10712 10154 10443 10714 10035 10163 11291 11941 10780 10035 10051 10156 10074 11394 10054 10556 11744 10051 10166 11260 11216 11929 11447 10217 11037 10650 10150 10051 10679 11347 12247 10150 10166 10880 11037 10051 10226 11310 11946 10036 10060 10178 10145 10171 10690 11961 10060 10287 11457 516 11922 10264 10154 10054 11047 11447 S22 10154 Runco Saisho Sampo Samsung Sanky Sansui Sanyo Saville Sceptre Schneider Scotch Scott Sears Sharp Shivaki Siemens Signature Simpson Singer Sky North Solar Drape Sole Sony Soundesign Sova Soyo Spectravision Spectroniq Squareview SR2000 Standard Components Superscan Supreme SV2000 SVA Sylvania Symphonic Syntax 10017 10011 10030 10009 10036 10060 10618 10812 100958 10030 10030 11904 10000 10047 10171 10060 10878 10070 10178 10030 10000 10035 10051 10154 10178 10036 MEIS 10037 10145 10030 10011 10060 10037 10000 10813 10030 10047 10017 10037 10154 10264 10650 10814 10060
107. 1 30675 30503 30539 30646 30675 30713 30821 30885 31268 31354 31506 30503 30539 30675 31533 31273 30651 30695 30831 32213 30723 30751 30522 32083 30752 30521 31521 30741 30770 30869 30503 30627 31612 31769 31985 30575 31224 32185 30571 31695 30651 30672 30490 30503 30571 30632 30703 31362 31462 31490 31579 31641 31762 31834 30675 30690 30733 30862 30503 30539 30646 30675 30713 30854 30885 31158 31267 31340 31354 31506 32084 30142 30525 30571 30631 30632 31460 31571 31965 Polaroid Polk Audio Portland Presidian Proceed Proscan Qwestar Radionette RadioShack RCA Realistic Redstar Reoc RIO Rotel Saba Sampo Samsung Sansui Schneider Schwaiger Sensory Science Sharp Sherwood Shinsonic Simaudio Singer Skyworth SM Electronic Sonic Blue Sony Superscan Sylvania Symphonic Tatung Teac Technics Technika Tevion Theta Digital Thomson Tivo Toshiba Tredex Unimax United 31061 31086 30539 30770 30675 30672 30522 30651 30741 30571 30522 30571 30822 31022 BAM AAAA 1965 30571 30763 30752 30869 30623 30651 30752 30199 30490 30573 30744 30899 31044 31075 31748 SISSA 30695 30783 30752 31158 30630 30675 30752 31256 31419 32015 30770 30533 30885 30751 30898 30690 30573 30715 30783 30869 91099 30533 30772 30864 31033 3
108. 1 NIAI JJ Hd T JJ Adjusting the Sound Picture Quality Audio Video Adjust For details on how to select set and cancel settings for each menu see GUI Menu Operation I amp page 26 Gull Setting items Surround Parameters Continued Setting contents LFE Adjust the low frequency effects level LFE e 10dB 0dB Adjusting the Sound Audio Adjust Default settings are underlined The sound being played in the surround mode can be adjusted to your liking The items parameters that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set surround mode For details on the adjustable parameters see Surround Modes and Parameters 187 page 124 A For proper playback of the different sources we recommend setting to the values below Setting items Surround Parameters Adjust surround sound parameters Setting contents Mode Set the play modes for the different surround modes In the PLIIx or mode Cinema Surround sound mode optimized for movie sources Music Surround sound mode optimized for music sources Game Surround sound mode optimized for games Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic playback mode PLII mode only In the PLIIz mode Height Dolby PLIIz Height playback mode _1 In the DTS NEO 6 mode Cinema Surround sound mode optimized for movie sources Music Surround sound mode optimiz
109. 1070 31431 31433 31516 31533 31536 31633 31981 30821 30675 30821 31268 30675 30821 31268 30770 3057 1 30759 31006 30490 30703 30770 30651 30571 30511 30522 30551 91505 91588 30503 30539 30573 30695 31045 31154 31503 31510 31588 31 69 30843 30770 30788 W X Y Z TUS r XCI On OW FY N JI T Z Universum Urban Concepts Wharfedale Xbox Yamaha Zenith Accurian Apex Digital Broksonic Coby CyberHome Funai Gateway Go Video Humax JVC Kreisen LG LiteOn Magnavox Packard Bell Panasonic Philips Pioneer Polaroid RCA Samsung Sanyo Sensory Science Sharp Sony Sylvania Toshiba Zenith 30591 30503 30539 30686 30522 32083 30490 30539 30545 30646 30817 31840 30503 30591 30741 30869 31906 30675 31416 31056 31419 31086 31129 31502 30675 31158 30741 31158 31730 31588 31164 31275 31421 30741 31158 31416 30646 30675 61506 31321 30490 31579 30646 31340 30631 31460 31086 30522 30490 30670 31158 30675 31033 31070 31431 31433 31536 30675 31510 31588 30741 CD Player Acoustic Research B C Aiwa Arcam Audio Research Burmester Cairn 40420 40157 40157 40157 40420 40157 California Audio Labs 40029 40303 Cambridge Soundworks Carver 40157 40157 40179 e n Curtis Mathes 40032 RCA PARE 40053 40179 40420 Bell amp Howell 20048 Janeil 20240 Philco 20081 i
110. 17 11564 21019510361 10053 10054 10650 10653 11774 11923 11962 10037 10054 10856 11178 11768 10790 Lumatron Luxor LXI MAG Magnasonic Magnavox Majestic Marantz Mark Matsui Matsushita Maxent Megatron Memorex Mermaid MGA MGN Technology Micro Genius Micromaxx Midland Minato Mitsubishi Motorola MTC Multitech NAD Nationa NEC NetTV Nikko Nikkodo Niko Nishi Nokia Norcent NTC NuVision Nyon Olevia 10037 10264 10163 10000 10035 10051 10154 10178 11498 10000 10109 10000 10037 10060 10706 11454 11944 10017 10030 10704 10037 10009 10037 10051 117 55 10009 10030 10154 MOSTA 10037 10030 10178 10150 10714 10017 10037 10011 10150 10250 10051 10011 10217 10037 10361 10226 10030 10178 11704 11755 10030 10030 11618 10030 10606 10824 10092 1165 7 10000 11144 10073 10361 10001 10036 10053 10156 10208 10030 10156 10030 10047 10092 10780 11755 10037 10854 10011 10163 10443 10650 11756 10047 10035 10178 11903 10150 10808 10047 10556 10030 10154 10836 10054 10030 10156 10866 10036 10455 10797 10092 10092 10631 12158 10556 10054 10035 10217 10037 10195 11911 10178 10051 10
111. 1730 DVD 1740 DVD 1910 DVD 1920 DVD 1930CI DVD 1940CI DVD 2200 DVD 2800 DVD 2800II DVD 2900 DVD 2910 DVD 2930CI DVD 3800 DVD 3910 DVD 3930CI DVD 5900 DVD 5910 DVD 5910CI DVD 9000 DVM 715 DVM 735 DVM 745 lt DVM 1800 DVM 1805 DVM 1815 DVM 1835 DVM 1845 DVM 2815 DVM 2845CI DVM 4800 DVD 800 DVD 1600 DVD 2000 DVD 2500 DVD 3000 DVD 3300 Blu Ray preset codes Codes pr r gl s Blu Ray DENON Model No Mod le num ro DVD 1800BD DVD 2500BT DVD 3800BD DVD A1UDCI Preset codes set upon shipment from the factory Les codes pr r gl s diff rent en fonctiom des livraison de l usine Q DVD Player DP DENON 32134 Video Cassette Recorder vM Tivo 20739 Television SONY 10810 Satellite Set Top Box SAT CBL DirecTV 01377 PRESET CODE 6 DENON www denon com Denon Brand Company D amp M Holdings Inc Printed in Japan 5411 10340 007D
112. 2 l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre pr t accepter tout brouillage radio lectrique recu m me si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada CAUTION To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power e i r p is not more than that permitted for successful communication ATTENTION Afin de r duire le risque d interf rence aux autres utilisateurs il faut choisir le type d antenne et son gain de facon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonn e quivalente p i r e ne soit pas sup rieure au niveau requis pour l obtention d une communication satisfaisante L NOTE ON USE OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L UTILISATION Keep the unit free from moisture water and dust Prot ger l appareil contre l humidit l eau et la poussi re Avoid high temperatures Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack e Eviter des temp ratures lev es Tenir compte d une dispersion de chaleur suffisante lors de l installation sur une tag re Unplug the power cord when not using the unit for long periods of time e D brancher le cordon d alimentation lorsque l appareil n est pas utilis pendant de longues p riodes Handle the power cord carefully Hold the plug when unplugging the cor
113. 37 20048 20060 NAD 40721 Video Cassette Recorder SEDENS are mem M Singer 20037 20240 NSM 40157 A Mark 20037 20240 20278 Sm 2808 Sonic Blue 20614 20616 21137 Onkyo 40101 40868 ABS 21972 Video EM UPS DNE 21 a Bur 20032 20067 20226 20636 40000 40032 40037 40087 numm 20048 20060 GoldStar 20037 20278 21137 NAD 20240 21032 21972 ale 40179 40393 40420 40468 Rem 20037 20240 Goodmans 20037 20278 21137 NEC 20067 Stack 9 21972 Panasonic 40029 40303 40388 40752 Aiko 20278 Granada 20042 20081 Nikko 20037 20278 STS 20042 21 40420 NA 20037 20742 21137 Grundig 20081 20226 20037 20278 20043 20081 20593 21593 Penney 40029 20315 Harman Kardon 20081 Nishi 20240 Symphonic 20240 20539 21593 Philips 40157 Alba 20278 Hewlett Packard 21972 Niveus Media 21972 Systemax 21972 Pioneer 40032 40468 pee 21972 Hitachi 20037 20042 20045 20089 Noblex 20240 Tagar Systems 21972 Polk Audio 40157 Allegro 21137 Howard Computers 21972 Northgate 21972 Tashiko 20037 Proceed 40420 fast NR 20278 T 21972 Olympus 21028 XS TONES 20067 20081 d _ American High 2008 Qughes Network 20042 20739 Optimus eac QED 40157 y Technics 20037 Anam National 20226 Humax 20739 Orion 20240 20278 ey TT aa Asha 20240 Hush 21972 o 20225 20226 20614 20616 Quasar 40029 anasonic 20837 21162 Telecorder 20240 Astra 20240 iBUYPOWER 21972 Radiola 40157 p 20037 20042 20067 20081 Thomso
114. 4 00200 00869 00749 00869 01333 00099 00887 00869 00723 00873 01023 01127 O Omega P Pace Panarex Panasonic Pansat Philips Pioneer Plasmatic Primestar Proscan R RadioShack Radix RCA S Saba Sagem Samsung Satstation Schwaiger Siemens SKY Sky Television SM Electronic Sony Star Star Choice Star Trak T Televisa Thomson Tivo Toshiba TPS U UEC V ViewSat Voom Z Zenith 00887 00455 00497 00847 01175 01159 00247 00701 00847 01159 00099 00200 00749 00847 01076 01142 01749 00329 01308 00442 00869 00392 00566 00566 00775 00869 00882 00143 00392 00566 01142 01291 01442 00710 00820 01114 01109 01142 01276 01442 01609 01083 00394 01111 00173 00099 00847 00887 01014 00713 00639 00847 00887 00869 00869 00887 00392 00566 01142 01442 00749 00790 01749 00820 01333 01232 00869 01856 Cable Set Top Box ABC Accuphase Acorn Action Active Archer C Century Cisco D Digeo 00008 00144 00003 00008 00237 00003 00237 00237 00237 00237 00276 00008 00877 01877 01187 00887 00775 01442 00775 01377 01175 dt On Director Fosgate General Instrument Gibralter Hitachi Insight Jerrold Macab Mitsubishi Motorola Noos Nova Vision Novaplex Ono Pace Panasonic Paragon Pioneer Regal Samsung Scientific A
115. 4 11904 1923 11904 20593 11904 20593 20240 21162 21262 20240 11917 20593 21162 21262 11911 20162221257 20240 Zi 162 11904 11917 11922 20240 11959 11904 11911 20240 11904 11904 11904 20593 11904 11909 11904 11909 11911 Satellite Set Top Box 00345 00123 01259 01367 00710 00200 00455 00713 00200 00713 00345 00847 01113 PFPA Asat Aston Atlantic Telephone Austar Bell ExpressVu British Sky Broadcasting Canal Chaparral CNS Crossdigital Digenius Digiwave DirecTV Dish Network System Dishpro Echostar Expressvu Fracapro Planet France Telecom Funai Galaxis GE General Instrument GOI Gradiente Grundig Hitachi Houston HTS Hughes Network Systems Humax Hyundai Indovision Innova ISkyB Jerrold JVC Kathrein Lava LG Marantz Mclntosh Mitsubishi Motorola Multichoice Netsat Next Level Nokia 00200 00142 01333 00497 00863 01176 00775 00847 00853 00216 01367 01109 00299 01631 00099 00247 00392 00566 00639 00749 01076 01109 01142 01377 01414 01442 01609 01749 01856 00775 01505 01775 00775 01505 01775 00455 00775 00871 01505 01775 00775 01775 00871 00871 01377 00863 00566 00869 00775 01775 00887 00173 00847 00749 01250 00775 00775 0177 00749 01142 01442 01749 01790 01159 00887 00099 00887 00869 00775 01177 00249 00658 01631 0141
116. 6 ich MAIN ZONE Set Configuration to 7 1ch 2 speaker system being used See page 14 for more information on speaker connections i a Gee Era Chamel to oR e5 1ch SB 1 speaker Example of Speaker Installation MAIN ZONE q Connect the surround back speaker to we Lch on the S BACK terminal SB Surrond Back FH Front Height FW Front wide 1 I ik die ot Assign setting Configuration Surround Back to Speaker system Example of speaker installation gt page 39 41 15 I page 41 11 1ch MAIN ZONE Set Configuration to 11 1ch 5 1ch MAIN ZONE Set Configuration to 5 1ch X Use the PRE OUT terminal for the front i B wide channel output i B i lam 51 mm I 1 if 1 n 9 1ch MAIN ZONE Set Configuration to 9 1ch _ _ _ e 5 1chiSB4 FH e Set Extra Channel SB FH FW to be When using speaker terminals for multi zone ZONE2 ZONE3 M used we FW Lum i Zone Amp Assign setting 5 1ch SB Y speaker Example of speaker installation gt page 39 41 oF system pag e 5 1ch FH FW MAIN ZONE ZONE2 e Set Assign Mode to 42 Example of 5 1ch SB FH MAIN ZONE 3 8 X Connect speakers to installation 3 jim 8 the ZONE2 speaker 7 1ch MAIN ZONE e Set Configuration to 7 1ch 1 I terminals Set Extra Channel SB FH FW to be _ e 5 1ch SB eed 5 1ch
117. 85 Detail Enter Terminate setup AVR 4810Cl performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function When connecting to a network without a DHCP function you will need to manually configure the IP address For details see page 49 Wired LAN settings in step 3 L1 How to connect with WPS Push button method Use access points routers equipped with WPS functions See the router user manual for details NETWORK CONNECTING DENON Select a connection method appropriate for your wireless LAN host Search 4 Enter Gem Cancel Set using the WPS functioya gt NETWORK CONNECTING DENON Select whether to connect with the push button or PIN code method PIN Code Enter Cancel Connect to network with the push button method Setting items Network Connecting Setting contents 3 Press WPS for the target access point 4 Select Connection and press ENTER When connection is established with access point Connection completed is displayed O gt NETWORK CONNECTING DENON Select Connection after pressing the access point WPS button sbunjes 4 Enter Cancel Start connection This WPS push button setup screen can be displayed directly by pressing and holding lt and gt on the main unit for at least 3 seconds L1 How to connect with WPS PIN code method Use access points routers equipped with WPS functions See the router user
118. 85 L Fast forwarding or fast reversing iz page 85 L To cue to the beginning of a track rz page 85 J Playing repeatedly i page 86 Shuffling playback iz page 86 L Searching pages iz page 86 e Use the RESTORER mode expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound I page 94 The default setting is Mode 3 e The title name artist name and album name can be checked by pressing STATUS during playback e he time default 30 sec for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI iPod tzpage 54 Press AV 1 gt to return to the original screen e Press POWER OFF or lt ON STANDBY gt and set the AVR 4810CI s power to the standby mode before disconnecting the iPod Also switch the input source to one to which the menu iPod is not assigned before disconnecting the iPod e Depending on the type of iPod and the software version some functions may not operate e DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPod data Viewing Videos on an iPod in the Browse Mode When an iPod equipped with a video function is connected to a DENON ASD 11R control dock for iPod video files can be played in the browse mode 1 Use AV to select Videos then press ENTER or gt Use AV to select the search item or folder then press ENTER or gt Use AV to select the video file then press ENTER or D Playback starts
119. A it is not possible to select XM HD Radio or sources with no digital input signals TUNER PHONO iPod etc Digital Audio Connections ZONE4 e Connect audio from the ZONE4 OPTICAL OUT terminal on the AVR 4810CI to the ZONE4 amp e Use bitstream compatible amps in ZONE4 ZONE4 MAIN ZONE ell FL SW AVR 4810CI OPTICAL Video Output Video Connection The video signals of the AVR 4810Cl s ZONE2 video output terminal are played by the ZONE2 monitor MAIN ZONE AVR 4810CI ZONE2 OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB CB PR CR VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB CB PR CR VIDEO It is not possible to output video signals input to the HDMI to ZONE2 105 lt ct N lt ct N 5 SLEEP MENU AV b 106 Button located on both the main unit Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual and the remote control unit BUTTON Button only on the main unit BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT MASTER VOLUME SOURCE SELECT lt lt ZONE2 ON OFF gt lt ZONE3 ON OFF gt 1 25011
120. ALOGI POM WAV Q O O O e WMA EMEN CNN Media Audio DTS HD MP3 MPEG 4 Master AAC FLAC 191 O 101 O DTS Resolution EXPRESS 101 01 91 With Flag With Flag O O O O O O O O O OR ORO O RN aoe NN signals DOLBY DIS DIS DOLBY 5 1ch 96 24 TrueHD 0 8 OR OR OR OR O DOLBY DIGITAL MULTI MULTICHPCM PCM O DOLBY DIGITAL EX With no Flag 5 1 5 4ch 4 3ch OR OM OR OR Q DOLBY DIGITAL 10 0 DOLBY DIGITAL 2ch OR OR ORO e mE O PCM multi ch PCM 2ch Super Audio CD DSD multi ch DSD 2ch a 1 Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output MAIN ZONE MONITOR OUT video Convert Input Signals Output Si
121. Assign 5 ave ASSIGN 1 2 DENON and then press Config om ENTER Assign Mode 72 73 Front NORMAL zonez BEY Zones 2 Pressing 1 select the MAIN ZONE channel configuration Configuration and then press V When selecting 7 1ch or 9 1ch in step 2 press lt gt to select the channels to be used Extra Channel and then press V When setting Configuration to 7 1ch 7 1ch 9 1ch 11 1ch SB When using surround back channel FH When using front height channel FW When using front wide channel When setting Configuration to 9 1ch SB FH When using surround back channel and front height channel SB FW When using surround back channel and front wide channel FH FW When using front height channel and front wide channel 34 Main remote control unit RCH operation buttons Cancel the menu Displaying the menu 4 Pressing lt gt set the usage method for the power amp Assign Mode and then press V NORMAL Z2 ez ALL Z2 ALL 22423 FREE his is the usual configuration Assign a power amp to ZONE2 audio Assign a power amp to ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio Assign all power amps to ZONE2 audio Assign all power amps to ZONE2 and ZONES audio Freely assign power amps to the desired channels 5 Pressing 1 set the connection method for the front speakers Front and then press V Bi WIRING Bi AMP 2CH BW
122. CM input signals DTS Decode and play only DTS input signals e This be set for input sources for which HDMI Digital is assigned at Input Assign I page 59 e Normally set this to Auto Set PCM and DTS when inputting the corresponding input signal Aspect Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI This can be set when the input source is NET USE Full Output at 16 9 aspect ratio Normal Output at 4 3 aspect ratio This can be set when i p Scaler is set to anything other than OFF Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu skh Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu 61 o 7 o e gt 7 Making the Input Settings Source Select Changing the Input Source s Display Name Rename GUI Setting items Rename 1 Press gt or ENTER Change the display name of 2 Use lt P to set the cursor to the character you want to change the selected input source 3 Use A V to change the character then press ENTER e Up to 8 characters can be input e The input character type can be switched by pressing SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU while the display name is being changed e he types of characters that can be input are as shown below Setting contents Upper case characte
123. Cl is compatible with ID3 Tag Ver 2 standards e he AVR 4810CI is compatible with WMA META tags WAV format Quantization bit rate 16 bits 2 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on the AVR 4810CI Contents downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected Also files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD etc on a computer may be copyright protected depending on the computer s settings 3 Copyright protected files can be played on certain portable players compatible with MTP Playing Network Audio USB Memory Devices Compatible formats Sampling Bit rate Extension frequency WMA Windows 32 44 1 48kHz 48 192kbps 1 Audio Layers 32 44 1 48kHz 32 320kbps mp3 WAV 32 44 1 48kHz wav aac MPEG 4 AAC 32 44 1 48kHz 16 320kbps m4a mp4 FLAC Free Lossless Audio 32 44 1 48kHz flac Codec About Napster Napster is a monthly subscription music distribution service provided by Napster This service allows users to download and play pieces of music they want to hear on the AVR 4810CI Before you can use Napster you will need to visit the Napster website on your PC to create an account and register as a member For details access the following site http www napster com choose index_default html About Rhapsody Rhapsody is a paid music broadcast service of RealNetworks When you
124. DENON AV SURROUND RECEIVER AVR 4810CI Owner s Manual GUI Graphical User Interface Use this manual in combination with the operating guide displayed on the GUI screen GUI Menu Operation I page 30 GUI Menu Map i page 29 Language I page 57 Remote Control Unit Operations 125 108 I SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION A RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK A DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE 10 11 12 To 14 19 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in
125. DMI output mode MultEQ XT Dynamic EQ Dynamic Volume audio delay etc last selected for the individual input sources The surround parameters tone settings and the volumes of the different speakers are stored for the individual surround modes Last Function Memory This stores the settings as they were directly before the standby mode was set When the power is turned back on the settings are restored to as they were directly before the standby mode was set Playing ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 Multi zone Function This function allows you to play sound in rooms other than the main zone where multi channel sound is played I The source selected for ZONE2 is also output from the recording output connectors Audio Output There are two methods to do this as described below Choose one of the methods D Zone playback by speaker output 2 Zone playback by audio output PRE OUT OPT OUT Use an external amplifier D Zone Playback by Speaker Output The ZONE2 and ZONES audio signals are output from the AVR 4810Cl s SURR BACK AMP ASSIGN speaker terminals using the amplifier assignment function Connecting and Setting the Speakers Amp Assign mode setting IS page 34 and the audio signals that are output Connecting the speakers ZONE2 8 zoNE2 IST ven a g GN EGY Cris AN ad Sup sory 4 4 Output signal Stereo L R ZONE3 ZONE3
126. E J Connections to Other Devices function it can automatically correct delay between the audio and Depending on the monitor you have e Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector video connected the display may not be correct when you set to Auto Dual In such a case set to either Monitor 1 or Monitor 2 IG page 43 page 23 e Video Camera Game Console i page 24 HDMI Control Function page 99 e USB Port 24 This function allows you to operate external devices from the receiver and operate the receiver from external devices e Component with Multi channel Output connectors Monitor Monitor uu NOTE 1 i Game e xt 57 xternal Power Amplifier page 25 e These functions will not work if the device connected to the console e External Controller IG 26 _1 Connecting to a Home network LAN rz page 26 HDMI terminal does not support Deep Color or x v Color signal transfer or the Auto Lip Sync function e The HDMI control function may not work depending on the device it is connected to and its settings e You cannot operate a TV or Blu ray Disc player DVD player that is not compatible with the HDMI control function L1 Copyright Protection System HDCP To play DVD Video and DVD Audio digital video and audio via the HDMI DVI connection the connected Blu ray disc player DVD Front Panel B HDMI OUT player and monitor each need to support a co
127. Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise We recommend using a normal type cable 1 Computer Recommended system e OS Windows XP Service Pack2 or later Windows Vista e Software Prepare one of the following Windows Media Player ver 11 DLNA compatible server software e Internet browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or later e LAN port e 300 MB or more free disk space X Operation is possible with DLNA servers other than the above but such DLNA servers are not supported For details check the Web e A contract with ISP is required to connect to the Internet No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband connection to the Internet e The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP Contact an ISP or a computer shop for details e Depending on the server video files may be displayed but they cannot be played on the AVR 4810CI Connecting Devices e f you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network settings are made manually make the settings at Network Connecting I page 46 e With the AVR 4810CI it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP functions to make the network settings automatically e When using the AVR 4810Cl with the broadband router s DHCP function enabled the AVR 4810Cl automatically performs the IP address setting and other settings When using the AVR 4810CIl connected to a network with no DHCP function make the settings for the IP addres
128. FH MAIN ZONE ZONE2 ZONES Assign M D 1 I MAIN ZONE e 5 1ch FW cns B X Connect speakers to ZONE2 St 6 8 Example of 5 1ch SB installation E 3 3 earns iiie cones speaker terminals ZONE3 Default 12 Installing the speakers When using front speakers with bi wiring or bi amping Amp Assign setting Example of speaker installation I page 39 41 MAIN ZONE When bi wiring Set Front to Bi WIRING T B When bi amp set Front to Bi AMP X Bi wire or bi amp the front speakers to the front speaker terminals and Bi Wir Bi Amp speaker terminals See page 15 on how to connect A Sco l When using different front speakers for dedicated 2 channel DIRECT STEREO mode playback Amp Assign setting Example of speaker installation 237 39 41 MAIN ZONE MAIN ZONE When bi wiring Set Front to 2CH BW 3 B 8 x B When bi amp gem Set Front to 2CH BA 1 I C eh X Bi wire or bi amp the speakers used for Switching dedicated 2 channel playback to the ZONE2 and ZONES speaker terminals Multi channel surround DIRECUSTEREO 13 Burner gt D T sbunjes oeqA euoz niniy 1013009 uoneunoju Bunoouse qnouJj 1I99dS
129. HANNEL is pressed JJ e gt e 3 Press RC SETUP to complete the setting 115 MACRO Function Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds Signal transmission indicator ce DEVICE 58 SELECTOR 1 i FC DTU NET USB ommum mom ommo eT 0 9 5 RC SETUP Signal transmission indicator DEVICE SELECTOR a a MACRO J JJ e gt P 3 1 0 9 i E RC SETUP Sse RCSETUP seen 116 Learning Function 1 Resetting Button by Button Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 6 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press the button you want to reset twice The signal transmission indicator flashes twice L Resetting by Device Mode Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 6 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice 3 Press DEVICE SELECTOR for the device you want to reset twice The signal transmission indicator flashes twice The signal transmission indicator flash
130. HERNET WLAN ANTENNA AC OUTLETS SWITCHED LM MAX SI sy SiZ Sig SiZ SI 2 2 gt 2 gt 2 2 a A a5 a A al a A J Q SAR ju JW J Q 5 2 e 2 e rS TS TIIS Dr DIRECT STEREO RESTORER DSX QUICK SELECT 2 ZONE OUTPUT Z Y oO E3 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ONCE ON OFF MENU SYSTEM CONTROL RETURN GUI S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 3 V AUX INPUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND S BACK 6 169 FHEIGHT EWIDE ZONE2 ZONES SPEAKER IMPEDANCE JNietwork AV SURROUND RECEIVER AVR 4810CI You cannot use the USB port on the front panel and rear panel simultaneously Select and connect the USB port you are to use e Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device This may cause radio interference with other devices Set as Necessary Set when you change the USB port for use USB Select 1257 page 62 e n the initial status USB memory devices can be used by connecting them to the USB port on the front panel e connect an iPod to the AVR 4810CI use the USB cable supplied with the iPod e When you want to playback a movie file stored on the iPod use the DENON control dock for iPod ASD 11R or ASD 1R sold separately I page 19 Control Dock for iPod e For iPods playback is possible on iPod touch classic and nano s
131. IUS HD Radio Digital Tuner Satellite Receiver Cable Tuner IPTV HDTV Set Top SAT CBL Box IPod Network USB Blu ray Disc Player HD DVD Player DVD Player Recorder CD Player Recorder Digital Video Recorder MAIN mode ZONE2 mode ZONE3 mode 2 Operate the component X For details refer to the component s operating instructions e n ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 modes can switch the MAIN ZONE power on or off by pressing POWER ON or POWER OFF QUICK SELECT MUTE and MASTER VOLUME can also be operated when the device selected is something other than MAIN In this case the zone you used last can be operated Check using the zone indicator Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Presetting Operating Preset Components CD Player CD Recorder The included main remote control unit can be preset to operate 1 Press DEVICE SELECTOR for the component to be EL Display EL Display devices of various brands operated E 2 gt LJ 1 The mode indicator of the device to be operated flashes zB button DN D SAT CBL POM Press DVD HDP VCR DVR TV or SAT CABLE eee To DS operated ees lt ove for the device you want to preset 2 Operate the component em m Repeat Press and hold in RC SETUP for at l
132. MUTE indicator This lights when the mute mode is selected Iz amp page 85 RESTORER indicator This lights when the RESTORER mode is selected I page 94 AUDYSSEY dd When Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume are OFF D SLEEP indicator This lights when the sleep mode is selected IS page 100 p Multi zone indicators These light when the power for the respective zone is turned on These light when in the auto tuning mode D Recording output source indicator This lights when the REC OUT mode is selected I page 98 e Decoder indicators These light when the respective decoders are operating HD indicator This lights during HD Radio reception Burner D Part Names and Functions B Rear Panel S 2 2 20 3 SAT CBL 4 HDMI ASSIGNABLE 1V SAT CBL VCR Pod DVR MONITORY 7 7 OUT VCR DVR AUDIO DVD HDP TV SATICBL VCR iPod ONE2 NA SAT TU 1 fo 1 SIRIUS 9 SIGNAL GND DTU ANTENNA HD Radio ae hee RL i mmmHmH Wi LEN M dum ae 9 9 tall aL ho O u E u E SE EE BERR Poft E ie E E L
133. N Button only on the main unit gt BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON STATUS Check the HD Radio Reception Information Press STATUS while an HD Radio broadcast is being received The current reception information is shown on the display CD Normal 2 Frequency Signal strength 3 Long station Program Program type 4 4 Title name Artist name Y 5 Album name Genre name If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast while HD and text is displayed the mode automatically switches to the analog reception mode the reception frequency is displayed Because of this the HD indicator and text may flicker if the station signal level is weak and unstable Playing Network Audio USB Memory Devices This procedure can be used to play Internet radio stations or music or still picture JPEG files stored on a computer or USB memory device Important Information About the Internet Radio Function e Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet Internet radio stations from around the world can be tuned in The AVR 4810Cl is equipped with the following Internet radio functions e Stations can be selected by genre and region e Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset e Internet radio stations in and WMA Windows Media Audio format can
134. New Feature screen is displayed Refer to page 56 for more information on Add New Feature e Press RETURN to erase the notification message Main remote control unit operation buttons ROH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu ES f Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu 51 o e gt 7 o e gt 7 LETT B PTS Te EST DT EIL ETELE ATT Making the Multi zone Settings Zone Setup Default settings are underlined Set the audio to playback with multi zone ZONE2 ZONE3 Setting items Bass Adjust low frequency range bass Setting contents 10dB 10dB OdB Treble Adjust high frequency range treble 10dB 10dB OdB Setting items Volume Level Set the volume output level Setting contents Variable Volume adjustment enabled by main unit and remote control unit 40dB 41 Fix volume at 40 dB Set when adjusting volume by external amplifier OdB 81 Fix volume at 0 dB Set when adjusting volume by external amplifier When Amp Assign Assign Mode I page 41 is set to Z2 472423 ALL Z2 or ALL Z2 Z3 the Volume Level setting is automatically set to Variable Volume Limit Make a setting for maximum volume OFF Do not set a maximum volume 20dB 61 10dB 71 OdB 81 Can be set when the multi zone
135. O 0 2 STEREO 0 3 96 note uV at 75 O ohms dBf 1 x 1075 W 875 MHz 1079 MHz 1 5 uV 14 8 dBf MONO 78dB STEREO 68 HD 85 dB MONO 0 1 96 STEREO 0 2 HD 0 02 Conforming to IEEE 802 11b Conforming to IEEE 802 11g Conforming to Wi Fi 05 55 11 5 5 2 1 Mbps Automatic switching AM 520 kHz 1710 kHz 19 AM 530 kHz 1710 kHz 20 uV 85 dB 0 02 OFDM 54 48 36 24 18 12 9 6 Mbps Automatic switching SSID Network name WEP key network key 64 128 bits WPA PSK TKIP AES WPA2 PSK TKIP AES 2 412 MHz 2 462 MHz Conforming to IEEE 802 11b 11ch DS SS Of which 1 channel used Conforming to IEEE 802 11g 11ch OFDM Of which 1 channel used AC 120 V 60 Hz 9 5 A 0 1 W Standby 434 W x 195 H x 424 D mm 17 3 32 x 7 43 64 x 16 11 16 19 1 kg 42 Ibs 2 oz 1 Main remote control unit RC 1126 Batteries Maximum external dimensions Weight LR6 AA Type two batteries 63 W x 238 H x 31 D mm 2 31 64 x 9 3 8 x 1 7 32 190 g Approx 6 7 oz including batteries 1 Sub remote control unit RC 1121 Batteries Maximum external dimensions Weight among wireless LAN devices RO3 AAA Type two batteries 49 VV x 220 x 24 5 D mm 1 59 64 x 8 21 32 x 31 32 114 g Approx 4 oz including batteries Wi Fi conformity indicates tested and proven interoperability by the Wi Fi Alliance a gr
136. Preset registration is also possible for the Device Select buttons in 2 This may power some devices ON OFF SAT iPod POWER Menu guide T scu wwe TVINPUT HomicontRoL RC SETUP Buttons J reoeo e a e Buttons Ji 110 EL Display J I 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI 1 I 1 LI 1 I 1 LI 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 LI 1 I 1 I 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI i LI I I 2 Set top box for Satellite Cable IP TV HD TV EL Display Device select button EL Display Device select CJ TT button TV SAT CBL DVD VCR fast reverse fast forward Power on 2 Power off 2 EL Display TUNER SAT CBL HDP UC pvp m C23 1 fast reverse fast forward Power on 2 Power off 2 SEARCH 1 Preset registration is also possible for the Device Select buttons in 2 This may power some devices ON OFF SAT TU iPod MENU Menu guide 4 ENTER SETUP RSTR RESTORER SOURCE 1 Preset registration is also possible for the Device Select buttons in 2 This may power some devices ON OFF RTN Buttons Ji Operating the Main Remote Control Unit iPod XM SIRIUS HD Radio Tuner FM AM EL Display EL Display EL Display mm EL Display EL Display EL Display a amp Device select Device select its ES Preset memory block sele
137. RANDOM The Z2 indicator flashes 3 To set to 3 Press USB The Z3 indicator flashes 4 To set to 4 Press ALL MUSIC FAVORITES The Z4 indicator flashes 3 While pressing MENU press ADVANCED SETUP with the tip of a pen The multi zone indicator turns off When changing a setting be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVR 4810Cl s IG page 55 Resetting the Settings While pressing ZONE OFF press ADVANCED SETUP with the tip of a pen All the multi zone indicators flash 4 times then all the settings are restored to their defaults 119 JJ e gt e Las 1 Other Information Explanation of Terms The AVR 4810Cl is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater Dolby Surround Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a multi channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories A total of 5 1 channels are played 3 front channels FL FR and C 2 surround channels SL and SR and the LFE channel for low frequencies Because of this there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a three dimensional feeling sense of distance movement and positioning is achieved A real overpowering sense of presence is achieved when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well Dolby Digital Plus D
138. RO 1 3 at which the signals were registered The registered signals are transmitted in the registered sequence Punch Through Function DVD HDP including BD and CD or VCR DVR mode buttons can be stored at unused TV or SAT CBL mode buttons For example when DVD mode buttons are assigned to the TV mode the DVD mode operations can be performed while in the TV mode Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 8 and 4 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the punch through setting mode is set 3 Press DEVICE SELECTOR for the device you want to punch through DVD HDP or VCR DVR 4 Press the button you want to punch through gt BI lt lt lt gt 1 4 W 9 1 11 Each time the button is pressed the signal transmission indicator flashes once 5 Press DEVICE SELECTOR for the device you want to punch through TV or SAT CBL Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting is completed The Punch Through function can only be registered for either TV or SAT CBL DVD HDP punch through may be automatically assigned depending on the equipment that has been preset to TV and SAT DEDE Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit Specifying the Zone Used with the Main Press and
139. TER e Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of the AVR 4810CI e Check the speaker connections e Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away e Perform again when quieter e Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing e Adjust the subwoofer s volume the surroundings are p B avovssey AUTO SETUP Caution T Front R None e Displayed speaker could not be detected e Check the connections of the displayed speaker B Bosse AUTO SETUP E Caution Front L Phase e Displayed speaker connected with the polarities reversed e Check the polarities of the displayed speaker eFor some speakers this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected If you are sure the connection is correct press A V to select Skip then press ENTER Displaying the menu lt Moves the cursor Confirm the setting Return to previous menu 37 operation buttons Up Down Left Right o e 7 o e gt 7 Make the Optimal Speaker Settings and Correct the Room Acoustics Audyssey Auto Setup Subwoofer Level Error Message and How to Adjust The optimal level of the subwoofer channel is 75 dB During subwoofer level measurement E Perform Audyssey Auto Setup 5 2 Speaker Detection I page 35 1 D an error message is displ
140. TTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON Playing Super Audio CD Recording on an External Device Either assign the input source to be used to HDMI REC OUT mode IE page 59 or assign D LINK at the Digital When using the audio video recording connectors VCR or DVR outputs you can record the audio or video from a different program source while listening to the currently played track setting CS page 59 Input Assign 2 Either turn lt SOURCE SELECT gt or press INPUT SOURCE SELECT to select the input source assigned Press lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT in step 1 ZONE2 SOURCE is shown on the display SOURCE SELECT lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT nuca The or indicator lights on the display 7 Turn SOURCE SELECT until RECOUT SOURCE Select the surround mode 1257 page 87 Selecting the is displayed surround mode The REC indicator lights lt E X We recommend playing in the DIRECT mode ZONE2 SOURCE ZONE2 TUNER lt ONE2 HD Radio Start playing the Super Audio CD The indicator lights on the display RECOUT HD Radio gt RECOUT SIRIUS RECOUT SOURCE X For operating instructions refer to the respective equipment S operating instructions 3 Turn SOURCE SELECT gt to choose the input source to be recorded e When playing 050 signals in the DIRECT
141. Tascam 40393 40420 Cybernex 20240 Magnavox o e cid 20240 20880 KLH 41318 Teac 40390 40420 40490 CyberPower 21972 27 Realistic dee 20048 20240 20278 Krell 40157 40303 D Daewoo 20037 20045 20278 21137 Vm T ReplayTV TT Linn 40157 m es Daytron 20037 20278 Marta 20037 Ricavision 21972 2 m V mm boa TT Matsui 20037 20348 Rio 21137 Magnavox 015 2709 10059 10187 10187 ais Matsushita 20081 21182 Samsung 20045 20060 20240 20739 ies W Wards do PG n sonny Media CenterPC 21972 Samtron 20240 SNI Y Yamaha 40036 40490 40868 _ ETT Medion 20348 Sanky 20048 _ Yorx 40000 20037 20048 20240 20278 Sansui 20067 20240 M 40000 40032 40179 40420 Electrophonic 20037 20348 21162 40468 m A Sanyo 20240 Micromega 40157 Scott 20043 20045 CD Recorder GUN 20037 20043 20240 20278 MGA 20043 20060 20240 20037 20042 20043 20045 Miro 40000 20348 20593 21593 Sears D Denon 42868 43868 Technology 20240 20048 20060 20067 Mission 40157 ae Microsoft 21972 Sharp 20032 20048 aC 40000 40032 40087 40179 RCA Funai 20037 20278 20593 21593 zm Um 40420 40468 S Sony 40000 40100 41364 GENES 21972 Midland 20240 intom MTC 40420 T Teac 40420 GE 20048 20080 20240 Mind 21972 Shogun 20240 Musical Fidelity 40393 crum 20080 Minolta 20042 Siemens 20037 emini Myryad 40157 Mitsubishi 20042 20043 20048 20060 Signature 200
142. Te EST CT EIL LES HLTT ES Setting items HDMI Control External devices can be controlled from the AVR 4810Cl and the AVR 4810CI can be controlled from external devices e Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check the settings eRefer to HDMI Control Function IG page 99 for more information about the HDMI control function e When the Control setting has been changed always turn off the power to the connecting devices afterwards and then turn back on The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is compatible with the HDMI control function Make sure that the TV and HDMI are connected when you perform HDMI control Setting contents Control e ON Use HDMI control function e OFF Do not use HDMI control function When a device that is not compatible with the HDMI control function is connected set Control to OFF e When Control is set to ON it consumes more standby power e When not using this unit for a long period we recommend that you press POWER on the main unit to turn off the power e HDMI Control does not work when the power to the equipment is off Either power on or set to standby Making the Audio Settings Audio Setup Default settings are underlined Make settings for audio playback Setting items EXT IN Setup Setup playback method for analog signals inputted from external input connectors EX TIN Se
143. accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart e apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when AS unused for long periods of time 9 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped Batterie
144. age Default settings are underlined Set the language for display on the GUI screen Setting contents English Francais Language can also be set by the following procedure However the GUI screen is not displayed 1 Press and hold the main unit s DSX and RETURN for at least 3 seconds Video Format appears on the display 2 Use A V to set GUI Language 3 Press 1 gt and set the language 4 Press the main unit s ENTER MENU or RETURN to complete the setting ROH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu Main remote control unit operation buttons f Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right ei For details on how to select set and cancel settings for each menu see GUI Menu Operation ICS page 26 Making the Input Settings Source Select Select input source and make playback settings L Items that be set with the Source Select procedure Changing the Input Terminal Assignments Input Assign I page 58 Making the Video Settings Video I page 60 Changing the Input Mode and Decoding Mode Input Mode 2 page 61 Changing the Input Source s Display Name Rename i page 62 Correcting the Input Source s Playback Level Source Level I page 62 Displaying the Playback Screen for the Different Input Sources Play IS page 62 Setting the Playback Mode Playback Mode i page 62 J iPod 1257 page 62 1 NET USB i page 62 Media Server USB iPod Napster and Rhapsody I a
145. aker terminal ZONA 122473 ZONE ZONE3 2 When front speakers for dedicated 2 channel DIRECT STEREO mode playback are bi wired or bi amped 1 Speaker connections e You can make Bi amp or Bi wire connections to one speaker system which supports Bi amp or Bi wire connection as shown below e Bi amp or Bi wire can only be used with speakers that support Bi amp or Bi wire Refer to your speaker manual Front speaker For Bi Amp for 2CH DIRECT STEREO 8 70NE3 1 Relationship between Amp Assign settings and channels output by each speaker terminal Amp Assign setting 1257 page 39 41 Channels output by each speaker terminal FRONT 2ch BW FRONT 2ch BW FRONT 2ch BA FRONT 2ch BA X Can be selected when Assign Mode is NORMAL Speaker Connections Bi Wir or Bi Amp speaker terminals Use when front speakers are bi wired or bi amped 2 Speaker connections e You can make Bi amp or Bi wire connections to one speaker system which supports Bi amp or Bi wire connection as shown below e Bi amp or Bi wire can only be used with speakers that support Bi amp or Bi wire Refer to your speaker manual Front speaker For Bi Amp 8 FRONT Bi Wir orBi Amp M X o CIC 0 Hw BA BB B A KJ E EA R JT Quir Ur Q gt 1 Relationship between Amp Assign settings and channels out
146. and Internet connection 87 page 26 e Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrating is completed e Even with a broadband connection to the Internet approximately 1 hour is required for the updating upgrading procedure to be completed Once updating upgrade starts normal operations on the AVR 4810Cl cannot be performed until updating upgrading is completed Furthermore updating upgrading the firmware may reset the backup data for the parameters etc set for the AVR 4810CI e he following backup data may be erased after an update or upgrade Internet radio preset channel e Internet radio Recently Played data Care of data in Internet radio media server and USB memory device e n the event of an update error during update or upgrade turn the AVR 4810CI s power off and then on again Update retry appears on the display and update restarts from the point at which update failed If the error continues despite this check the network environment e Information regarding the Firmware Update function Add New Feature will be announced the DENON web site each time related plans are defined e When usable new firmware is released with Firmware Update or Add New Feature a notification message is displayed on the GUI screen When you do not want to be notified set Update Notification I page 51 and Upgrade Notification 187 page 51 to OFF Gull Making Language Settings Langu
147. annels to be used from among surround back speakers SB front height speakers FH front wide speakers FW sbunjes 5 1ch SB FH FW 5 1ch FH 5 1ch SB FH 5 1ch FH FW Determine the maximum number of channels used by the AVR 4810CI Item 3 Assign Mode settings Select power amp usage method Item 4 Front settings Select front speaker connection method set channels assigned to power amps IS page 40 Y Y Y Perform the settings for each speaker usi g Speaker Configuration I page 41 gt d See page 41 for details of the settings in Assign Mode and Front ROH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu Main remote control unit operation buttons 40 Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Q Free Assign settings It is possible to freely select the signal being output from each speaker terminal except for Bi Wir Bi Amp ZONE2 ZONE3 when Assign Mode is set to FREE In the screen below press AV to select the speaker terminal then press 1 gt to select the output signal gt o AMP ASSIGN 2 2 DENON FRONT FRONT F CENTER CENTER C SURR SURR SB H W S BACK H W HEIGHT SW BA ZONE2 22 73 Config 11 1ch Extra ch SB FH FW Assign Mode FREE RETURN Return Select the signal output from the FRONT terminals Refer to the chart below for the signals that can be output to ea
148. arge speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies e Small Use of a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies If Speaker Configuration Subwoofer page 41 is set to No the setting is automatically set to Large Subwoofer Set the presence of a subwoofer e Yes Use a subwoofer e No Select when a subwoofer is not connected If Speaker Configuration Subwoofer I page 41 is set to No the setting is automatically set to No If the Front setting is Small the setting is automatically Yes SW Mode Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer e LFE When the 2ch Direct Stereo Front setting is set to Large the LFE signal alone is output from the subwoofer Also when the 2ch Direct Stereo Front setting is set to Small the front channel low range signal is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer e LFE Main The front channel low range signal is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer This can be set when 2ch Direct Stereo Subwoofer is set to Yes f Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu Making Detailed Settings Manual Setup Setting items 2ch Direct Stereo Continued Setting contents Crossover Outputs at below set frequency each speaker s bass signal output from the subwoofer e 40Hz 60Hz
149. audio output device Monitor Out Make settings for monitor output HDMI Amp Playback through speakers connected to the receiver TV Playback through TV connected to the receiver When the HDMI control function is operating the setting of audio playback in the connected TV takes priority page 99 HDMI Control Function Auto Dual The presence of a TV connected to the MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 terminal is detected automatically and that TV connection Is used Monitor 1 A TV connected to the MONITOR 1 terminal is always used Monitor 2 A TV connected to the MONITOR 2 terminal is always used e f both the Monitor 1 and 2 connectors connected and Resolution I page 61 is set to Auto the signals are output with a resolution compatible with both TV e With Resolution 87 61 not set to Auto check whether the TV you are using is compatible with the resolution under HDMI Information Monitor 1 and Monitor 2 87 page 96 e Depending on the monitor you have connected the display may not be correct when you set to Auto Dual In such a case set to either Monitor 1 or Monitor 2 e You can also set Monitor Out by pressing M SEL on the main remote control unit f Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting See overleaf Return to previous menu 43 o gt 7 o e gt 7 B PTS
150. available in the Party Mode There can only be one organizer in the network To form a new party mode first cancel the current party mode 101 v lt T Convenient Functions Operating a Wireless LAN Compatible Mobile Terminal to Play Music and Still Pictures e Perform this procedure using a wireless LAN compatible mobile terminal conforming to the DLNA Digital Living Network Alliance standard e his function allows you to play contents located on a computer music server or mobile terminal device connected in a network by operating a mobile terminal device in the same network e here are two types of operations on the mobile terminal device Playing Contents on a Computer Media Server Wireless LAN compatible router Computer Media server AVR 4810CI Streaming lt n Streaming 3 Playback starts D Select a content 4 Operation Select a player Mobile terminal device o piay From the mobile terminal device browse the media server in the same network and choose the contents you want to play From the mobile terminal device select the AVR 4810CI among the products in the network Playback of the contents selected in step 1 begins X When selecting the AVR 4810Cl from the mobile terminal device the name of the AVR 4810CI is displayed at Friendly Name IGS page 50 Friendly Nam
151. avorites and played using the same operations as for Internet radio stations IG page 78 e Presettings are erased by overwriting them e When the operation described below is performed the media server s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play preset or favorite music files e When you quit the media server and then restart it e When music files are deleted or added on the media server e When using an ESCIENT server place ESCIENT before the server name Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP Media Transter Protocol standards can be played on the AVR 4810 1 Playback preparation D At USB Select I gt page 62 select the USB port to be used 2 Connect the USB memory device to the USB port set in Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select 3 IS page 31 Set the main remote control unit to the NET USB mode I page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Press A V to select the search item or folder then press ENTER or gt Press A V to select the file then press ENTER or gt Playback starts once buffering reaches 10096 Adjust the items below 1 Adjusting the master volume I amp page 85 2 Selecting the surround mode tz page 87 21 Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality I page 90 Oo oH C 1 To stop t amp page
152. ayed when the subwoofer level is outside the 72 78 dB range When using a subwoofer with built in amplifier active type adjust the subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 78 dB range Check the Measuring Results and Equalizer Type after Audyssey Auto Setup Parameter Check This is displayed after Audyssey Auto Setup is completed Select SW Level Lane Adjust the volume M tching TT hen B Bosse AUTO SETUP i pro DENON som Bl AupvssEv AUTO SETUP E YSSEN a _ Nu Nu Caution 1 zr 6 Subwoofer Level Matching 1 3456 The subwoofer s level is too high or low Please select SW b f th t adjust Sa tease of your active subwoofer unit Press V to select press 2 Level Matching and adjust the level of your subwoofer unit subwooter 50 that the level indicates approx 7 66 99 li PARAMETER CHECK do not to the z the measured level iS er Parameter Check 9 subwoofer select Skip See and then ress romm 4 or range Blue 66 E 2 Select SW Test mre X If the measured level is within the 72 78 dB range the level Start and then press indicator is blue RAE MRT 10 3456 dicator Is blue 2 Press A V to select the item you want to check and Please place the microphone at ear height at main Subwoofer evo a A When the measured level is within the 72 78 dB then pre
153. ble when the surround back speaker setup is set to None 2 This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to 1spkr or None 3 This mode is not available when the front height speaker setup is set to None Mode selectable in initial status Mode fixed when AFDM is ON Selectable mode Non selectable mode xooe 126 Input signals DTS HD DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL MULTICHPCM Super Audio CD WMA Windows DOLBY DOLBY Media Audio DTS HD DTS DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL EX erea ec Seat PCM PCM DSD DSD 5 1ch 96 24 TrueHD Plus T psy 5 1 5 4ch 4 3ch multi ch 2ch multi ch 2ch N LINEAR ote Surround Mode ANALOG PCM WAV MP3 MPEG 4 Master AAC FLAC Pesoton ENPRES cue Flag aWith Flag STANDARD MULTI CH IN X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X x x MULTI IN PLIIx CINEMA x x x x x x x X x X x x x x x x X X x MULTI IN PLIIx MUSIC x X x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x O x O x MULTI IN x PS X X X x S X X AX X X X X X X Q X Q X MULTI IN DOLBY EX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X A X x MULTI CH IN 71 X xX X X X X xX xX X X X X x x x x x O 71 x X x DIRECT O O e 9 9 tJ 9 x x DSD DIRECT x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x DSD MULTI DIRECT PX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X AX X x x MULTI CH DIRECT x x x x x x x x x X X X X X X
154. c EQ M is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories Audyssey Dynamic Volume is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories 122 HDCD HDCD is an encoding decoding technology that greatly reduces the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining compatibility with the conventional CD format thus expanding the dynamic range and achieving a high resolution Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs automatically to select the optimum digital processing identified HocD HDCD High Definition Compatible Digital and Microsoft are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Inc in the United States and or other countries HDCD system manufactured under license from Microsoft Corporation Inc This product is covered by one or more of the following In the USA 5 479 168 5 638 074 5 640 161 5 808 574 5 838 274 5 854 600 5 864 311 5 872 531 and in Australia 669114 Other patents pending DENON LINK DENON LINK is a unique digital balanced transfer type interface developed by DENON It offers high speed high quality transfer of digital audio data with low signal loss It can be used together with DENON AV Amplifier equipped with a special DENON LINK connector using a single cable to enable playback with high sound quality It allows digital transfer of the 192 kHz 24 bit 2 channel digital signal
155. cannot be received UNAUTHORIZED is with your XM subscription package Consult the latest channel displayed guide at www xmradio com or www xmradio ca for the current list of channels For information on receiving this channel visit www xmradio com or www xmradio ca contact XM Satellite Radio at 1 800 967 2346 or 1 877 438 9677 the distance from the wireless LAN s access point remove any obstacles and otherwise improve visibility then try reconnecting Also install away from microwave ovens and the access points of other networks e here are multiple networks and the usable channels overlap Set the access point s channel settings away from the channels used SIRIUS Satellite Radio for other networks Alternatively connect using a network cable Symptom Cause Countermeasure There are multiple networks and the usable channels overlap Set CHECK SIRIUS The SiriusConnect Home Tuner unit is not connected Check that 22 the access point s channel settings away from the channels used TUNER is displayed heconnectons atre correct E a E Kee ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected Check that the connections are 22 is displayed correct XM Satellite Radio NO SIGNAL is e he signal cannot be received Reposition the antenna ae CHECK XM e The XM Mini Tuner is not installed or not fully seated in the XM TUNER is Mini Tuner Dock or the XM Mini Tuner dock is not connected to displayed the AVR 4810CI Conf
156. ce is set to Internet Radio A B C D E F G e A1 B1 B8 C1 C8 D1 D8 E1 E8 F1 F8 G1 G8 HDMI Information Shows information about HDMI input output signals and monitor Signal Info e Resolution Color Space Pixel Depth Monitor 1 Monitor 2 e Interface Supported resol 96 Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu Other Operations and Convenient Functions e Set the Blu ray disc player s HDMI Control setting to ON the Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Other Operations DENON LINK setting to 4th For instructions on operation refer Button located on both the main unit E E Playing a Blu ray Disc Player Compatible to the Blu ray disc player s manual and the remote control unit BUTTON Button only on the main unit BUTTON with DENON LINK 4th e The jitter free function does not work except during BD playback In this case the video signal is output from the HDMI OUT terminal Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON and the audio signal from the DENON LINK terminal Tou A a id Ped DENON LINK e When a BD is played with the input mode set to Auto playback
157. ch speaker terminal Speaker terminal S BACK FHEIGHT FWIDE FRONT CENTER SURROUND S BACK 1 F HEIGHT 2 FANTDIESS ZONE2 ZONES Z2 Z3 MONO FHEIGHT FWIDE FRONT CENTER SURROUND S BACK 1 F HEIGHT 2 F WIDE 3 ZONE2 ZONES Z2 Z3 MONO FRONT CENTER SURROUND FRONT CENTER SURROUND S BACK 1 FHEIGHT 2 F WIDE 3 ZONE2 ZONES Z2 Z3 MONO FRONT CENTER CENTER S BACK 1 SURROUND ZONE2 S BACK 1 ZONES F HEIGHT 2 F WIDE 3 ZONE2 ZONES Z2 Z3 MONO No channel output 1 Can be selected when SB is set in Extra Channel 2 Can be selected when FH is set in Extra Channel 3 Can be selected when FW is set in Extra Channel e When 22 23 MONO is selected ZONE2 and ZONES use monaural audio The ZONE2 mono audio is output from the speaker terminal s L ch and the ZONE3 mono audio is output from the R ch e When selecting S BACK for the center speaker terminal output set the Speaker Configuration Surround Back 57 41 to 1spkr e When selecting ZONE2 or ZONES for the center speaker terminal set the Zone Setup Channel I page 52 to Mono Confirm the setting Return to previous menu VFL lave mm Setting items Amp Assign Change the power amp assignment to suit the speaker system configuration Setting contents Configuration Select MAIN ZONE channe
158. ck Select Name 1E page BS ZONE2 monitor so operation can be performed watching this on screen display e n ZONEA only input sources to which XM HD Radio NET USB and digital input have been assigned can be selected e Use the sub remote control when performing Quick Select memory or call up in ZONEA 107 Operating the Connected Devices by Remote Control Unit Operating the Main Remote Control Unit e On the main remote control unit the display switches according to the device being operated and the mode e Inthe MAIN TUNER SAT TU DTU iPod and NET USB modes when the remote ID is set the AVR 4810Cl can be used independently even in an environment containing multiple DENON amplifiers I page 112 Setting the Remote ID Signal transmission indicator DEVICE _ SELECTOR E MAIN Les aon QUICK L SELECT LR SAT CBL 38 Le amp DVD H D B gs VCR DVR 55 L STV J e gt e Las 1 2 MASTER VOLUME MUTE 9 108 Operating AV Equipment X The mode switches each time MAIN is pressed Press DEVICE SELECTOR for the component to be operated The indicator for the component to be operated flashes 1 MAIN 3 o c sii ica z m c o uU ES lt zoo aS L lt MAIN ZONE2 ZONES ZONE4 MACRO TUNER FM AM IAM SIR
159. ck that the AVR 4810CI is in the standby mode 00 L IN mn VIDEO ASSIGNABLE 1 DVD 2 SAT CBL 3 CD ise d T T i a T Y TRE Un AEn HDP SAT CBL VCR iPc iN VIDEO 5 A n o VIDEO DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE 0 eol dH EO O AUDIO TUNER WED WED lt RS 232C ANTENNA REMOTE CONTROL TRIGGER OUT find hu 1 g ROOM TO ROOM joc 12V 150mA MAX Set as Necessary Set this to use the RS 232C connector for the DENON RF remote controller 232C Port 1257 page 56 When using the AVR 4810Cl in combination with the DENON RF remote controller RC 7000CI sold separately or RF remote receiver RC 7001RCI sold separately two way communication is enabled The AVR 4810Cl s status information as well as iPod and Internet audio music files can be browsed watching the RF Remote Controller s display For details refer to the operating instructions of the respective devices On the GUI menu when setting 232C Port to 2Way Remote you cannot use the RS 232C connector as an external controller IS page 55 26 1 REMOTE CONTROL jacks Infrared sensor Infrared retransmitter Extension jack for future use Connect devices corresponding with room to room function to this jack Input Output 2 3
160. cted SAT CBL HDMI3 VCR iPod HDMI4 Assign DVR HDMI5 3 RCA None V AUX HDMI6 None None SAT CBL VCR iPod DVR Select Return Change digital input connector assignment Changing the Input Terminal Assignments GUI Select input source and make playback settings Press ENTER then use lt to select the input terminal to be assigned Input Assign Default settings are underlined 1 Examples of Input Assign Menu Screen Displays 2 Press AV to select the input source Ge gt assicn 1 2 DENON you want to set then press gt Default mm Cites OR EN DVD HDMI 1 RCA None HDMI2 None 2 RCA None None 1 SAT CBL HDMI3 2 gt VCR iPod HDMI4 None None Assign DVR HDMI5 2 3 RCA None V AUX HDMI6 None None m gt gt INPUT ASSIGN 1 2 DENON DENON 1r 1 HDMI ti DIGITAL COMP lI lI lI 1 HDMIT 11 COAX1 441 RCA HDMI2 None 112 1 INone 1 None 11 OPTI tiNone None Input Assign I 1 I HDMI3 2 NONE 1 1 Video Input Mode Rename Select Cancel Assign COAXIAL 2 input connector Source Level ISAT CBL VCR iPod HDMI4 i None iNone Assign DVR HDMI5 OPT2 3 RCA None
161. ction Preset memory block selection memory block selection RPT 1 track All track repeat play m TU AY Channel selection TU AY 1 track album shuffle play Preset memory registration BAND AM FM switching Playback Switch search modes MENU SEARCH Direct search Preset memory registration AVP Category search ENTER To parental lock password check TUNER SAT CBL z SAT TU iPod SAT TU iPod Manual search fast reverse fast forward Still Pause i SEARCH MENU SEARCH 4 Multi cast switching A V Direct Frequency tuning MENU SEARCH Press and release oress and screen hold SIRIUS SETUP RSTR RESTORER CH Preset channel selection Preset channel selection 0 9 1 8 Direct channel search 0 9 SETUP RSTR RESTORER CH Preset channel selection Preset channel selection 1 8 Direct frequency tuning 0 9 Page search mode 90 TVINPUT HomiconTRoL RC SETUP Press and Browse Remote mode hold switching Cursor Manual Search A V i Buttons Ji SETUP RSTR RESTORER RTN Return HD Radio only beeen JJ e gt e 111 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Signal NET USB transmission Setting the Remote ID EL Display JH EL Display indicator When using
162. ctor Video section e Standard video connectors Input output level and impedance Frequency response e S Video connectors Input output level and impedance Frequency response e Color component video connector Input output level and impedance Frequency response 2 5 mV 1 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz 74 dB A weighting 150 mV 0 03 1 kHz 3 V 1 Vp p 75 O ohms 5 Hz 10 MHz 0 3 dB when video convert set to OFF Y brightness signal 1 Vp p 75 O ohms C color signal 0 286 Vp p 75 QO ohms 5 Hz 10 MHz 0 3 dB when video convert set to OFF Y brightness signal 1 Vp p 75 O ohms signal 0 7 Vp p 75 O ohms PR CR signal 0 7 Vp p 75 O ohms 5 Hz 100 MHz 0 3 dB when video convert set to OFF Tuner section Receiving Range Usable Sensitivity 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity S N IHF A Total harmonic Distortion at 1 kHz LL HD Radio section Receiving Range Usable Sensitivity S N IHF A Total harmonic Distortion at 1 kHz Wireless LAN Network type wireless LAN standards Transfer rate Security Used frequency range No of channels General Power supply Power consumption Maximum external dimensions Weight FM note uV at 75 O ohms dBf 1 x 1075 W 875 MHz 1079 MHz 1 0 uV 11 2 dBf MONO 1 6 uV 15 3 STEREO 23 uV 38 5 dBf MONO 770 STEREO 72 dB MON
163. d Manipuler le cordon d alimentation avec pr caution Tenir la prise lors du d branchement du cordon For apparatuses with ventilation holes Do not obstruct the ventilation holes e Ne pas obstruer les trous d a ration Do not let foreign objects into the unit Ne pas laisser des objets trangers dans l appareil e Do not let insecticides benzene and thinner come in contact with the unit e Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides du benz ne et un diluant avec l appareil Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way Ne jamais d monter ou modifier l appareil d une mani re ou d une autre L Contents Getting Started Flow of Operations Through Playback 2 Cautions Handling 2 Cautions on Installation o rm ehem arem 2 Preparations ee er ny errr ere 3 oco CD IGS 3 About the Remote 3 Part Names and Functions 4 Front Parieleesessexeseasxssesaakswseaksdckksae iare v a nex rd edi ean Oa p o CY Faden 4 Display T 5 Rear qud Rapide ba Rd a es 6 REMOTE Control bob bo p rado 7
164. d data iPod Made for iPod means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries X The iPod may only be used to copy or play contents that are not copyrighted or contents for which copying or playback is legally permitted for your private use as an individual Be sure to comply with applicable copyright legislation Important Information About SIRIUS XM Radio To listen to Satellite Radio you ll need to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner sold separately to your satellite ready receiver Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US except Alaska and Hawaii and Canada Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial free music from categories ranging from Pop Rock Country R amp B Dance Jazz Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play games from select leagues and teams Additional programming includes expert sports talk uncensored entertainment comedy family programming local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner you ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoyin
165. dB Accurate spatial sound rendering however has not yet reached the limits of perception as human perception relies on the combination of sounds arriving from many more directions than what 5 1 surround sound systems provide Audyssey DSX technology was developed to overcome the spatial sound rendering limitations faced by 5 1 surround sound formats The ITU 5 1 channel standard recommends three front loudspeakers and two rear loudspeakers The Left L and Right R front loudspeakers should be placed at 30 relative to the central listening position The Center C loudspeaker should be at 0 and the surround loudspeakers SL SR should be placed between 100 and 120 All loudspeakers must be equidistant from the center listening position or compensated with time delay if that is not possible A separate low frequency effects LFE channel is used to reproduce additional bass content from the subwoofer There are certain things that 5 1 surround sound systems do well compared to 2 channel stereo For example it is possible to move sounds across the front seamlessly It is also possible to create ambience behind the listener But 5 1 channel surround systems do not provide enough channels from which to render the required reflected sound components for a seamless and enveloping soundstage Unfortunately the additional two back surround channels in 7 1 systems are not in the right place to provide a significant perceptual improvement A
166. dding more channels to a surround system is not for special effects Accurate spatial sound reproduction requires rendering of directional sound cues and non directional ambient cues Reflections arriving after the direct sound play a critical role in the perception of soundstage width and depth To have the most impact additional surround channels should be used to control the direction time of arrival and frequency response of the reflected sound to render an expanded soundstage that reproduces sound with better localization and envelopment than what 5 1 systems provide 121 5 3 gt 5 4 3 gt Explanation of Terms ee Advanced AL24 Processing Multi Research in the perception of auditory source width has shown that there are strong preferences in the direction of reflected sound and the perception of soundstage width and spaciousness The single most important direction of side wall reflections is 60 DSX provides a pair of Wide channels LW and RW at 60 with appropriate frequency response and perceptual processing to match the requirements of human hearing In fact the Wide channels are much more critical in the presentation of a realistic soundstage than then Back Surround channels found in traditional 7 1 systems A more enveloping 7 1 channel system is one in which Wide speakers are used instead of Back Surround speakers Adding surround channels behind the list
167. de I page 88 is set to something other than STANDARD e Front Height cannot be set if the HD Audio source being played includes a front height channel In this case the Front height channel is played back without decoding in mode using the input signal AFDM Auto flag detect mode Detects the source s surround back channel signal and sets the optimum surround mode automatically e OFF Do not set e ON Set Example Playing Dolby Digital software with EX flag e When AFDM is set to ON the surround mode is automatically set to the DOLBY D PLIIx C mode e To play in the DOLBY DIGITAL EX mode set AFDM to OFF and Surround Back to MIRX ON e Some Dolby Digital EX sources do not include EX flags If the playback mode does not switch automatically even when AFDM is set to ON set Surround Back to MTRX ON or PLIIx CINEMA e f the setting in Speaker Configuration Surround Back I page 41 is None Surround Back is not displayed Surround Back Sets the method of generating of the surround back channel For 2 channel sources ON The surround back channel is used OFF No signal is played from the surround back channels Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu Setting items Surround Parameters Continued Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality Audio Video Adjust Setting contents Fo
168. device e When recording analog audio use the analog connection e See page 80 Recording on an External Device REC OUT mode for operating instructions For instructions on HDMI connections see Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals on page 17 Digital video recorder AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN 5 L R Oo Q aD OPTICAL z B USB 18 iPod DIRECT SELECTABLE Coty R nung 4 NERA P SAT TU z is o DTU ANTENNA HD RF VIDI m 9 9 E TV SAT CBL VCR Pod TUNER 5 e SATTU 1 SIRIUS 4 ANTENNA n b 2 m TO D 9 12V 150mA MAX FRONT CENTER SURROUND S BACK WSS Jr FHEIGHT EWIDE ZONE2 ZONES 5 5 5 Sd SIGNAL SPEAKER IMPEDANCE RS 232C oooo STRAIGHT CABLE Set as Necessary NOTE Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is To record video signals through the AVR 4810CI use the same type assigned of video cable for connection between the AVR 4810CI and the player Input Assign I amp page 58 as the cable used for connection between the AVR 4810CI and the recorder 20 Video Cassette Recorder e Sel
169. device that the set cannot recognize is connected his is not a malfunction DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power e USB memory device is connected via USB hub Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port e USB memory device is in format other than FAT16 or FAT32 Set the format to FAT16 or FAT32 For details refer to the USB memory device s operating instructions e USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions When divided into multiple partitions only files stored in the top partition can be played e Files are stored in a non compatible format Record the files in a compatible format e You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set e Characters that cannot be displayed are used This is not a malfunction On this set characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with a eFthernet cable is not properly connected or network is disconnected Check the connection status e Program is being broadcast in non compatible format Only Internet radio programs in MP3 and WMA can be played on this set e The computer s or router s firewall is activated Check the computer s or router s firewall settings e Radio station is not currently broadcasting Choose a radio station that is currently broadcasting e address is wrong Check the set s IP address e Files are stor
170. dicators light during party mode IS page 101 Playing the Same Network Audio on Different Devices Connected in a Network Party Mode Function e ORGANIZER This lights to indicate that party mode has started as Organizer ATTENDEE This lights to indicate that party mode has started as Attendee AUDYSSEY MULTEO XT indicators Lighting is as follows depending on the setting of Dynamic EQ ie page 92 and Dynamic Volume IGS page 93 AUDYSSEY e MULTEQ When Dynamic EQ and Dynamic DYN VOL m Volume are ON AUDYSSEY TN e When the Dynamic EQ setting is DYN EQ 11 I 11 Ir ON and the Dynamic Volume 1 Meee ILL Advanced 124 indicator This lights when Advanced AL24 Processing page 122 or AL 24 Processing Plus IE page 122 is activated Input mode indicators D LINK indicator This lights when playing using DENON LINK connections Ie page 98 Playing Super Audio CD D HDMI indicator This lights when playing using HDMI connections D Tuner reception mode indicators These light according to the reception conditions when the input source is set to TUNER or HD Radio e STEREO In the FM mode these light when receiving analog stereo broadcasts Q QUICK SELECT indicators TUNED Mo Lights when the broadcast is properly tuned in Master volume indicator setting is OFF e AUTO
171. dio channel Searching Categories 1 Press lt gt Channel category 2 Use lt gt to select the category to use A V to select the desired channel Accessing XM Radio Channels Directly 1 Press SEARCH 2 X f no button is pressed within several seconds the channel automatically switches to the one whose number has been input Press ENTER to set that channel Reception switches to the selected channel Press 0 9 to input the channel Example Accessing channel XM123 Press 1 2 and 3 e LOADING is displayed while channels or data being received e Refer to Troubleshooting XM Satellite Radio 857 133 regarding other messages XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio When operating SIRIUS with the AVR 4810Cl via the main remote control unit or sub remote control unit use SAT TU Before operating set to SAT TU operating mode SAT TU of INPUT SOURCE SELECT and SAT TU of DEVICE SELECT mode can use only either XM or SIRIUS The default setting is for SIRIUS operation Set GUI menu Option Setup Remote SIRIUS XM c page 55 to SAT TU SIRIUS Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select ICS page 31 The input source becomes that set in step 1 Set the main remote control unit to the SAT TU mode I page 108 Operating the Mai
172. e Edit X The following operations are possible from the mobile terminal device e File operations play stop pause track search e Play mode settings repeat random e Volume adjustment 102 Playing Contents on a Mobile Terminal Device Wireless LAN compatible router AVR 4810CI po 3 Playback starts 4 Operation 1 Select a content 2 Select a player Mobile terminal device 1 Select the contents you want to play from among the mobile terminal devices From the mobile terminal device select the AVR 4810CI among the products in the network Playback of the contents selected in step 1 begins X When selecting the AVR 4810Cl from the mobile terminal device the name of the AVR 4810CI is displayed at Friendly Name IGS 50 Friendly Name Edit X The following operations are possible from the mobile terminal device e File operations play stop pause track search e Play mode settings repeat random e Volume adjustment B is displayed on the GUI screen while the mobile terminal device is being operated e For the various settings and operating procedures see the operating instructions of the mobile terminal devices being used e When selecting the AVR 4810CI from the mobile terminal device the name of the AVR 4810CI is displayed at Friendly Name Friendly Name can be edited at
173. e Quality 57 page 90 Playing an iPod Using a Control Dock for iPod When a DENON control dock for iPod ASD 1R or ASD 11R sold separately is used you can play images and music stored on an iPod Listening to music on an iPod Playback preparation D Connecting the DENON control dock for iPod to the AVR 4810CI I 19 Control Dock for iPod 2 Set the iPod in the DENON control dock for iPod Turn the AVR 4810CI power on I page 28 Turning the Power On 3 Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select i ICS page 31 The input source switches to the source to which the control dock for iPod is assigned and the iPod menu is displayed GUI screen 1 6 DENON 1 2 DENON Music ig Videos Playlistes Artists Albums f Songs f Genres f Composers When using an ASD 1R When using an ASD 11R When using an ASD 11R the Music and Videos folders are displayed on the top menu X Once communications between the AVR 4810CI and the iPod are completed the connections screen is displayed on the iPod X f the connections screen is not displayed the iPod may not be properly connected Reconnect it Set the main remote control unit to the iPod mode 1257 page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Playing Components Press SEARCH and hold it down for a 2 seconds or more to select the display mode X Ther
174. e are two modes for display the contents recorded on the iPod Browse mode This is the mode for displaying the iPod information on the GUI screen to operate the iPod In this mode you cannot perform operations directly on the iPod itself With the AVR 4810Cl s display only English letters and numbers and certain symbols can be displayed Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with period Remote mode This is the mode for performing operations directly on the iPod itself while watching the screen displayed on the iPod In this mode the GUI screen is not displayed Remote iPod is displayed on the AVR 4810Cl s display Remote mode Browse mode Display mode Audio file Picture file Playable files Movie file Main remote control unit AVR 4810CI iPod Active buttons 1 When using an ASD 11R DENON control dock for iPod 2 Video may not be output depending on the combination of ASD 1R or ASD 11R DENON control dock for iPod and iPod Use A V to select the item then press ENTER or to select the file to be played 7 Press ENTER or gt Playback starts Adjust the items below 1 Adjusting the master volume I amp page 85 2 Selecting the surround mode z page 87 21 Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality I page 90 1 To stop t amp page 85 L Stopping playback temporarily iz amp page
175. e to the power of the zone set to ON 2 When Setting for Input Source Activate trigger out when the input source set to ON is selected Valid for the zone set to ON with When Setting for Zone When Setting for Surround Mode Activate trigger out when the surround mode set to ON is selected Valid when the MAIN ZONE set to ON with When Setting for Zone is selected and when the input source set to ON with When Setting for Input Source is selected When Setting for HDMI Monitor Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to ON is selected Valid when the MAIN ZONE set to ON with When Setting for Zone is selected and when the input source set to ON with When Setting for Input Source is selected When setting for Vertical Stretch Activate trigger out through linkage when Vertical Stretch I page 43 is set to ON e ON Activate trigger on this mode e Do not activate trigger on this mode Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu res T Remote SIRIUS XM Set to SAT TU operating mode on the included remote control unit Remote ID Set when you operate another DENON AV amplifier with the remote control unit of the AVHR 4810Cl Match the remote control unit you are using with the remote ID of the AVR 4810CI SAT TU XM Set when operating XM SAT SIRIUS Set when operating SIRIUS
176. ear of manufacture of your equipment some buttons may not operate In such cases we recommend using the learning function I page 113 Learning Function I 1 LI 1 I 1 LI 1 I 1 LI 1 L 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI 1 L 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI 1 LI E POWER 1 Preset registration is also possible for the Power off 2 Device Select buttons in 2 This may power some devices ON OFF MENU SEARCH AVAP ENTER SETUP RSTR RTN CH Switch channels up down Popup Menu 15 TUNER vaux SATTU TVINPUT HDMI CONTROL RC SETUP a Buttons J TE E T ele Select title or chapter 0 9 10 or channel selection 1 Preset registration is also possible for the Device Select buttons in 2 This may power some devices ON OFF 109 JJ e o gt e 1 JJ e e Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Digital Video Recorder Video cassette Recorder IV Cassette Deck EL Display Jm TUNER SAT CBL EL Display em TUNER SAT CBL DMI SAT TU Device select button LJ 1 pd sat ceL Auto search cue Playback Manual search fast reverse fast forward MENU SEARCH 4 RTN Return Switch channels up down 1 9 Selection 1
177. east 3 seconds Disc Skip The signal transmission indicator flashes twice X For details refer to the component s operating instructions For chargercompatible devices Auto search cue Playback Manual search fast reverse fast forward 3 Press 0 9 and input the 5 digit number of the Blu ray Disc Player HD DVD Player DVD Player brand of the component to be preset The numbers DVD Recorder are shown in the Preset Code Table 1257 End of this manual TEL Display When the code is registered the signal transmission indicator flashes twice When the preset code is transmitted the mode indicator for the component to which that code belongs flashes EL Display select fem l j1 utton HDP DVR TV RPT Repeat RND Random Disc Skip SKIP For chargercompatible devices conus v amm Manual search Pause c TUNER SAT CBL un Stop Power on 2 DTU NET USB oe MAIN E3 ci LECT 4 L QUICK SELEC Power off 2 X The input mode is canceled if no button is operated for 10 seconds Buttons MENU n SEARCH AV4b D Amp cursor ENTER Amp enter fast reverse fast forward SETUP RSTR RESTORER Still Pause E RTN Amp return mw Stop 0 9 10 Track Selection e Some brands have more than one preset code If the component does not operate try inputting a different code e Depending on the model and y
178. ect Home Tuner HDMI iL 0 ASSIGNABLE TV SAT CBL VCR iN DVD HDP FM indoor OOOO antenna Supplied odi AUDIO DVD TV SAT CBL TUNER FM SAT TI EN a SS WEST COAX RS 232C ANTENNA 750 L 1 S o REMOTE CONTROL 9o ON Em i f o o o STRAIGHT o CABLE ROOM TO ROOM DC 12V 1 o Om q CD PHONO AUDIO X When connecting HORIZON digital audio Area 1 Point the antenna toward the sky in the east northeast or southeast either through a window or outside OW 2 HOP 3 SAT CBL 1 DVD HDMI ASSIGNABLE eS COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE iN HDP TV SAT CBL VCR iPod DVR DVR AONITORY TT 4 DVD 2 SAT CBL 3 0 00000 OOC 2000 either through a window or outside rH a im an an Ly w NS AG A A A Pras E l 1 1 Area 4 Point the antenna toward the sky in the west northwest or PR CR MONTOR Y PR CR FL A 100 20008 SB HL 0000000000 00000008006 SAT CBL_VCR Pod cR DVR M Zones ZONE TUNER FM rea jw ti u 2e 57 WS K STA A WY nd d Lu a Q 7 o J Q antenna A asd 759 k gt S 4 REMOTE CONTROL iN 1
179. ect the terminal to use and connect the device e When recording analog audio use the analog connection e See page 98 Recording on an External Device REC OUT mode for operating instructions For instructions on HDMI connections see Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals on page 17 Video cassette recorder AUDIO m VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO AUDIO IN COMPONENT TR D DENON LINK i ZA g JO 4 DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE OPTI l m fcl 3 SAT CBL 4 5 0 fin DVD P 1 REMOTE CONTROL TRIGGER OUT DC 12V 150mA MAX K IA SPEAKERS Set as Necessary Set this to change the input signal to which the input source 15 assigned Input Assign IG page 58 To record video signals through the AVR 4810Cl use the same type of video cable for connection between the AVR 4810CI and the player as the cable used for connection between the AVR 4810CI and the recorder Connecting Devices Satellite Receiver Cable Tuner Set Top Box XM Connector e The AVR 4810CI is an XM Ready receiver You can receive XM Select the terminal to use and connect the device Satellite Radio by connecting to the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock For instructions on HDMI connections see Connecting Devic
180. ed for music sources e When Surround Parameters Front Height I amp S page 91 is set to the Height mode is set automatically e The Music mode is also effective for movie sources including a lot of stereo music Cinema EQ Soften the treble range of movie soundtracks for better understanding e OFF Cinema EQ is not used e ON Cinema EO is used DRC Compress dynamic range difference between loud and soft sounds e Auto Automatic dynamic range compression on off control according to source This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode e Low Middle High These set the compression level e OFF Dynamic range compression always off D COMP Compress dynamic range difference between loud and soft sounds e OFF Turn dynamic range compression off e Low Middle High These set the compression level 90 Main remote control unit operation buttons e Dolby Digital sources e DTS movie sources e DTS music sources 10daB Center Image Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound e 0 0 1 0 0 3 Panorama Assign front L R signal also to surround channels for wider sound e OFF Do not set ON Set Dimension Shift sound image center to front or rear to adjust playback balance e 0 6 3 Center Width Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for w
181. ed in a non compatible format Record in a compatible format e You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set e Set and computer are connected by USB cable The set s USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer Server is not found or it is not possible to connect to the server Symptom Cause Countermeasure e The computer s or router s firewall is activated Check the computer s or router s firewall settings e Computer s power is not turned on Turn on the power e Server is not running Launch the server e Set s IP address is wrong Check the set s IP address Cannot connect to preset or favorite radio stations For some radio stations Server Full or Connection Down is displayed and station cannot be connected to Sound is broken during playback Sound quality is poor or played sound is noisy Cannot login to Rhapsody Incorrect Username or Password is displayed Cannot compile Playlist Cannot delete Rhapsody Channel registered in My Channels Cannot delete Tracks Playlists Channels registered in My Library Cannot login to Napster Incorrect Username or Password is displayed e Some iPods do not support being used connected directly to the USB port e Radio station is not currently broadcasting Wait a while before trying again e Radio station is not currently in s
182. el the Party Mode While in the party mode press PARTY Exit Party Mode is displayed on the GUI screen Press lt gt to select Yes then press ENTER Power off Attendees component is displayed Press lt to select Yes or No then press ENTER Yes power of the attendees is turned off and the party mode is canceled No The party mode is canceled without turning off the power of the attendees Participating in the Party Mode as an Attendee e When the organizer starts the party mode up to four attendees are selected automatically No operation is required e When a device becomes an attendee appears on the display The input source automatically switches to NET USB and the same network audio as on the organizer is played e f there are fewer than four attendees a device can join the party mode after it has started To participate in the party mode perform the operation described below Press PARTY Enter Party Mode is displayed X An error message is displayed when you not connected to a network 2 Press lt gt to select Yes then press ENTER yoeqheld L1 To Cancel the Party Mode While in the party mode press PARTY Exit Party Mode is displayed on the GUI screen Press lt gt to select Yes then press ENTER In this case the other devices remain in the party mode Rhapsody Napster and USB not
183. emote control unit 4 Adjust the item below L Adjust the Volume D Press lt ZONE2 3 4 REC SELECT and select the zone to be adjusted 2 Turn MASTER VOLUME gt to adjust Operation on the remote control unit In the zone mode whose volume you want to adjust press VOLUME Adjustable range 80dB 40dB 18dB When the Volume Display setting is Relative Adjustable range 0 41 99 When the Volume Display setting is Absolute X Upon purchase Volume Limit is set to 2 Turning off the Sound Temporarily MUTE In the zone mode for which you want to mute the sound press MUTE The sound is reduced to the level set at menu Mute Level page 53 X To cancel either adjust the volume or press MUTE again X The setting is canceled when the zone s power is turned off X The volume be adjusted in ZONE2 and ZONES Menu Operation Quick Select Function Sleep Timer Function The settings related to tone adjustment and volume can be made It is also possible to save three settings for multi zone This is useful when you want to sleep while listening in ZONE2 or ZONES In the zone mode for which you want to operate Set the items below to the settings you want to save In ZONE4 the power switches off by interfacing with the MAIN ZONE press MENU T input Source cepas 108 sleep timer settings The ZONE2 ZONE3 is displayed the ZONE2 or menu i
184. ener has a very small impact compared to the increase in envelooment and soundstage width that the front wide channels will provide After side reflections the next most important acoustical and perceptual cues come from reflections above the front stage DSX provides a pair of Height channels LH and RH at a 45 azimuth angle and elevated to a 45 angle in the median plane In addition to creating new Wide and Height channels DSX also provides Surround Processing to enhance the envelopment of the Surround and Back Surround channels if present DSX Surround Processing processes the standard surround signals in the time and frequency domains to improve the perceived sense of envelopment and blending with the other speakers in the surround system Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion is a scalable system that can adapt to the practical needs of the user The first level of surround stage enhancement comes from adding the Wide channels The second level comes from adding the Height channels If it is practical to have both Wides and Heights then the surround performance will be further enhanced DSX automatically reconfigures its processing to optimize surround rendering over any number of available speakers beyond 5 1 AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT DYNAMIC VOLUME AUDYSSEY Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories U S and foreign patents pending Audyssey MultEO9 XT is a registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories Audyssey Dynami
185. entication a WPA authentication method L1 TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Protocol This is a network key used for WPA The encryption algorithm is RC4 the same as for WEP but the security level is increased by changing the network key used for encryption for each packet L AES Advanced Encryption Standard This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the current DES and 3DES and because of its high security it is expected to be applied widely to wireless LANs in the future It uses the Rijndael algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to divide the data into blocks of fixed lengths and encrypt each block It supports data lengths of 128 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128 192 and 256 bits as well offering extremely high encryption security 123 5 3 gt 5 gt a gt Surround Modes and Parameters Surround Mode PURE DIRECT DIRECT 2ch DS RECT DSD MULTI DIRECT VIQETINGE DIRECT STEREO EXT IN MULTI CH IN WIDE SCREEN DOLBY PRO LOGIC Hz DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx DOLBY PRO LOGIC II DTS NEO 6 DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL Plus DOLBY TrueHD DTS SURROUND DTS 96 24 DTS HD DTS EXPRESS neural MULTI CH STEREO SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB CLASSIC CONCERT MONO MOVIE VIDEO GAME MATRIX VIRTUAL 124 Front Surround Surround Front Wide L R L R Back L R L R x OR
186. er Impedance in the GUI menu to 6 O ohms e Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker terminal The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the and sides touch each other I Protection Circuit e Never touch the speaker terminals while the power supply is connected Doing so could result in electric shock O gt T 7 Protection Circuit If the core wires touch the rear panel and the screws etc or the sides touch each other the protection circuit will be activated and the power indicator will flash red at intervals of 0 5 secs If the protection circuit is activated the speaker output is isolated and the power supply goes to the standby state If the power supply is turned off after the power supply cord is withdrawn please confirm that speaker cable and input cable are connected Also if replaying large sound levels by using a speaker having an impedance less than that specified eg 4 O ohms the temperature will rise and the protection circuit might be activated The power supply will go into the standby state and the power indicator will flash red at 2 second intervals In this case please switch off the power supply and wait until the Connecting the Speaker Cables AVR 4810Cl has cooled down and the surrounding ventilation is good Carefully check the left L and right
187. ervice It is not possible to connect to radio stations that are no longer in service e Station is congested or not currently broadcasting Wait a while before trying again e Network s signal transfer speed is slow or communications lines or radio station is congested This is not a malfunction When playing broadcast data with a high bit rate the sound may be broken depending on the communications conditions e File being played has a low bit rate This is not a malfunction e Login information is incorrect Check if the Username for Rhapsody has been properly entered Re enter the Password Password is not displayed www rhapsody com denon e The AVR 4810CI does not respond to playlist compilation When the playlist is compiled in PC Application it is registered to My Library In this way the playlist can be played in AVR 4810CI e Cannot be done with AVR 4810Cl Delete from PC Application e Cannot be done with AVR 4810CI Delete from PC Application e Login information is incorrect Check if the Username for Napster has been properly entered Re enter the Password Password is not displayed http www napster com choose index default html ires pan Cannot connect to e The settings of the SSID and network key WEP are incorrect network Match the network settings with the AVR 4810CI s settings e The reception is poor and the signals cannot be received Shorten CH e You selected an XM channel that is blocked or
188. es includes home antenna each sold separately and subscribing to Equipped with HDMI Terminals on page 17 the XM service e Plug the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock into the XM connector on Satellite Receiver Cable Tuner the rear panel VIDEO AUDIO e Position the Home Dock antenna near a south facing window to VIDEO S VIDEO AUDIO COAXIAL receive the best signal Po For details see Listening to XM Satellite Radio I page 71 When making connections also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock TV Select the terminal to use and connect the device For instructions on HDMI connections see Connecting Devices gt T Equipped with HDMI Terminals 17 TV VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO S VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL XM Mini Tuner Home Dock MONITOR n A n A on o o o o o o 9 ao E S NGZ SEY SZ VIDEO 1 V TV SAT CE 2 6 eS VCR Pod DVR BHHVCR p 3 4 5 8 n De 55 Deos Sus m 3190 06 MIO W rE 007 OO O 6 1 _ 4 d ee JVR MONITORY ZONE 2 COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE 0 ZONE2 MONTOR Y P CRMIM 1 _ 2 DVR 008
189. es twice Press 9 7 and 8 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice 3 Press MACRO 1 3 you want to reset Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Punch Through Function Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 8 and 4 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice All Settings Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 8 and 1 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes 4 times All the settings are restored to their defaults Operating the Sub Remote Control Unit e The sub remote control unit is equipped with frequently used buttons so It can be used for simple remote control unit operations e The sub remote control unit can also be used for multi zone so you can use it to control the AVR 4810CI from other rooms e he operations listed below can be performed with the sub remote control unit e Switching the input source Adjusting the volume e XM SIRIUS HD Radio and iPod operations NET USB direct play GUI menu and ZONE2 on screen display operations one power on off e t is not possible to operate devices
190. ess ENTER or gt Rhapsody Start a 30 day trial Sign in to your account Return 5 Enter Username and Password Rhapsody Account Sign In Username Password OK Enter Username After inputting the Username and Password select OK then press ENTER If the Username and Password match the top menu for Rhapsody is displayed Username Input characters Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Symbols amp lt gt Q NM Numbers 0123456789 Space Password yoeqheld Input characters Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Symbols amp lt gt Numbers 0123456789 Space Adjust the items below 2 Adjusting the master volume I amp page 85 2 Selecting the surround mode page 87 J Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality I page 90 e he password should be no longer than 99 characters e The password may not contain underscores e Press RETURN to cancel the input When Cancel input is displayed select Yes then press ENTER 83 Playing Rhapsody Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit _ gt BUTTON Button only on the
191. essary When connecting by use of DENON LINK set Digital to D LINK Input Assign IG page 59 23 O gt T O gt T 7 Connecting Devices Video Camera Game Console Select the terminal to use and connect the device For instructions on HDMI connections see Connecting Devices Equipped with HDMI Terminals on page 17 Video camera Game console VIDEO AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL MASTER VOLUME DSX SETUP MIC STATUS VN aN MENU SYSTEM CONTROL RETURN GUI S VIDEO VI L AUDIO R IDEO V AUX INPUT OPTICAL 3 JNietwork AV SURROUND RECEIVER AVR 4810Cl Set as Necessary Set this to change the input signal to which the input source is assigned Input Assign 1257 page 58 When a non standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input the video conversion function might not operate 24 USB Port When you connect an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port you can enjoy music etc stored on the iPod or USB memory device L Front panel L Rear panel USB memory USB memory device device USB iPod DIRECT SELECTABLE MONITOR hs 5 2 EB 4 4 DVD 2 SAT CBL 3 CD peius 3 DVR DIGITAL e oe MASTER VOLUME CLD 5VAA ET
192. first listen to Rhapsody it is necessary to subscribe to a Rhapsody account at the Rhapsody homepage by your PC and register this machine See the Rhapsody homepage for details www rhapsody com denon T yoeqheld Playing Network Audio USB Memory Devices Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit _ gt BUTTON Button only on the main unit gt BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit gt BUTTON ENTER v lt T AV lt gt STATUS E NET USB 5 6 er MEMO lt gt SOURCE SELECT MAIN mode 78 Playback preparation D Check the network environment then turn on the AVR 4810Cls power K page 26 Connecting to a Home Network LAN 2 If settings are required make the Network Connecting I page 46 Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select C3 ICS page 31 Set the main remote control unit to the NET USB mode I page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Press A V to select the item you want to play then press ENTER or gt The station list is displayed Press A V to select the station then press ENTER or D Playback starts once buffering reaches 10096 Adjust the ite
193. function e 5 the AVR 4810CI properly set 5 the HDMI Control Control Iz amp page 44 set to ON 5 the Power Off Control I 44 set to ON 5 the Control Monitor 157 44 set for the monitor output connected to television e n the case of dual monitor connection is the Control Monitor page 44 on the GUI menu set to a monitor without HDMI control e Are the HDMI control function settings of all equipment correct Should any of the operations below be performed the interlocking function may be reset in which case repeat step s 1 and 2 e Input Assign HDMI I page 59 setting has changed e Monitor Out I page 43 setting is changed e here is a change to the connection between the equipment and the HDMI or an increase in equipment 99 yoeqheld Button located on both the main unit ENTER v lt T PARTY SLEEP lt Al ENTER CHANNEL LEVEL 100 Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual and the remote control unit BUTTON Button only on the main unit BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON QUICK SELECT QUICK SELECT Certain Amount of Time Sleep Timer Function With this function you can set the AVR
194. g a Control Dock for iPod es 66 Playing an iPod Connected Directly to the AVR 4810CI s rr 68 Tuning in Radio Station ooo e nne is 69 Listening to FM AM Broadcasts 70 Listening to du Satellite 71 Listening to SIRIUS Satellite hisce ta tentoriis 73 Listening to HD Radio Technology 75 Playing Network Audio USB Memory Devices 76 Listening to Internet Radio seien 78 Playing Files Stored On 1 irent 80 Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices eres 81 Listening to Napster nep 82 Listening to Rhapsody eetan iieiea 93 Operations During Playback E 85 Adjusting THE Master Volume 85 Turning Off the Sound Temporarily Muting eessen 85 Listening with Headphone sere CUIR 95 TO StOB 95 Stopping Playback 95 Fast forwarding or Fast reversing ERN P 85 To Cue to the Beginning of a 95 Playing Reneatedly esesiestitiescisnpnt ettet itta mtn insist 86 Sco e N 26 Sh fflirig 86 Playing in Random
195. g contents remote control display twice then press lt gt to select the first letter you want unit operation Shuffle songs from current to search for T Albums SEO e f there are multiple items starting with the selected letter they are displayed in alphabetical order Songs Shuffle all songs e f it is not possible to search the list unsorted list is displayed umen OFF Cancel shuffle mode To cancel press A V or SEARCH X GUI menu Shuffle 187 page 62 can be set in the same way If the list is not in alphabetical order you be able to perform a character search REPEAT T S QOL RANDOM 86 Sub remote control unit Selecting the Surround Mode D Playing Sources According to the Sources Audio Signal Format Number of Channels Standard Playback Operations The selectable surround modes depend on the following e Format of the audio signals being input e Number of channels of the audio signals being input e The set amplifier assignment IG page 41 1 Playing the source 125 page 66 2 Press STANDARD to select the surround mode Surround L Surround Playback of 2 channel Sources 1 The mode switches as shown below each time STANDARD is pressed DOLBY 1 signals are decoded in DOLBY for playback The signals are decoded in DOLBY PLIIx for playback The signals are decoded in DOLBY for
196. g the service Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners Whichever service you choose there are a variety of programming packages available including the option of adding The Best of SIRIUS programming to your XM tuner or The Best of XM programming to your SIRIUS tuner enabling you to enjoy the most popular programming among both services The Best of packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at this time Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for children To subscribe to XM U S customers should visit xmradio com or call 1 800 XMRADIO 1 800 967 2346 Canadian customers should visit xmradio ca or call XM Listener Care at 1 877 GETXMSR 1 877 438 9677 To subscribe to SIRIUS U S and Canadian customers can call 1 888 539 SIHI 1 888 539 7474 or visit sirius com US or siriuscanada ca Canada SIRIUS XM Radio Legal SIRIUS XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries All other marks and logos are the property of their respective owners All rights reserved SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold separately Taxes and a one time activation fee may apply XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners each sold separately are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service All programming and fees subject to change It is prohibited t
197. geCo Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary DLNA e DLNA DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance e Some contents may be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED products Windows Media DRM A copyright protected technology developed by Microsoft Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device WM DHRM to protect the integrity of their content Secure Content so that their intellectual property including copyright in such content is not misappropriated This device uses WM DRM software to play Secure Content WM DRM Software If the security of the WM DRM Software in this device has been compromised owners of Secure Content Secure Content Owners may request that Microsoft revoke the WM DRM Software s right to acquire new licenses to copy display and or play Secure Content Revocation does not alter the WM DRM Software s ability to play unprotected content A list of revoked WM DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC Microsoft may in conjunction with such license also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners About Wireless LAN J Wi Fi Wi Fi Certification
198. gn Menu Screen Displays 1st page Set items 1 4 referring to Steps for setting Amp Assign I page 40 41 gt B gt AMP ASSIGN 1 2 DENON Item 1 Ta Config 7 1ch Item 2 ee Extra ch SB Assign Mode Z2 Item 3 Front NORMAL Item 4 ZONE2 ZONE3 EN Return Select the speaker channel configuration 2nd page X The signal being output by each speaker can change according to Amp Assign setting X The speaker terminals and the output from the pre out terminals can be checked on this screen D Current settings 2 Speaker terminal name 3 Signal being output from speaker terminal 4 Output from pre out terminal X Terminals being used are greyed out 6 Assicn 2 2 DENON Vemm FRONT i HF CENTERII CENTER IIC SURR SURR s Il SB H Wip S BACK SB CCSIGNAL Ju S FRE JI Config 7 1ch Extra Ch SB Assign Mode 72 Front NORMAL ZONE3 II 1172 E um um on ee ee dj inL RETU eturn Connect speaker to match spe 4 signal See also page 14 15 for how to connect the speakers aw os SW BA ZONE2 I1 ZONE2 39 o gt 7 B PTS Te EST fare MO ETELE 1 Steps for setting Amp Assign Item 1 Configuration settings Select MAIN ZONE channel configuration Item 2 Extra Channel settings Select the ch
199. gnals GUI menu displayed HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO ON OFF x x x x x x x x Only the GUI menu is displayed ON x x x E VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO 2 x x B S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO ON x O 1080p x x 2 g X COMPONENT 2 X 2 X 2 ON x 1080i 480p x x x x ON x 4801 5761 i xX xX COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT O COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT ON x 1080p x O x X COMPONENT x VIDEO ON 1 x 1080p x VIDEO VIDEO x VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO ON x 1080i 480p x x x X VIDEO ON x O 480 576 x O COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT IGOMPONENT O COMPONENT COMPONENT ON x 1080 Q x COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT X S VIDEO X S VIDEO ON 1 1080p x S VIDEO S VIDEO x S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO ON x 1080i 480p x O COMPONENT X S VIDEO X S VIDEO ON x O 4801 5761 x COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT ON x 1080p O O X COMPONENT X S VIDEO X S VIDEO ON 1 x 1080p O S VIDEO S VIDEO x S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO ON x 10801 480p O O X S VIDEO X S VIDEO ON x 480i 576i O O COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT O COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT ON x x xX X 2 ON x x E x VIDEO IRE X VIDEO 2 ON 5 x gt x
200. h they are stored in the folder USB Memory Devices A USB memory device can be connected to the AVR 4810Cl s USB port to play music and still picture JPEG files stored on the USB memory device Also files stored on an iPod can be played when the iPod is connected directly to the AVR 4810Cl s USB port See Playing an iPod Connected Directly to the AVR 4810Cl s USB Port IG page 68 e Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP Media Transfer Protocol standards can be played on the AVR 4810 e The AVR 4810Cl is compatible with USB memory devices in FAT16 or FAT32 format 1 Album Art Function When an MP3 music file includes album art data the album art can be displayed while playing the file Slide Show Function Still picture JPEG files stored on USB memory devices can be played as slide shows The time for which each picture is displayed can be set The AVR 4810CI plays back image JPEG files in the orientation in which they are stored in the folder Compatible formats Media server 1 USB memory Intern i ternet radio devices fi WMA Windows Media Audio MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 WAV MPEG 4 AAC FLAC Free Lossless Audio Codec JPEG A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network 1 Media server and USB e AVR 4810
201. hand those channels will not be measured Therefore you can save an amount of time commensurate with that which would have been taken to measure those channels 66 Select Channel AUTO SETUP Drea DENON Skip and then press STEP1 Preparation 1 23 4 5 9 ENTER Connect the speakers and place them according to the recommendations in the manual Set the following Items if necessary Amp Assign Auto Setup Start Press AV to select a channel press lt gt to select the item and then press ENTER 1 Configurable channels Subwoofer Set the subwoofer channel Surround Back Set the surround back channel Front Height Front Wide L Settings Measure the selected channel Skip Skip the selected channel and do not measure Set the front height channel Set the front wide channel X To cancel press RETURN Displayed when Surround Back Front Height and Front Wide are set using Extra Channel in Amp Assign Return to previous menu Make the Optimal Speaker Settings and Correct the Room Acoustics Audyssey Auto Setup Perform Audyssey Auto Setup STEP3 Measurement STEP4 Calculation e Audyssey Auto Setup detects the presence of each speaker and automatically calculates the speaker size channel level distance and crossover frequency settings In addition acoustical distortions are corrected within the listening area e When measuring begins a test tone
202. he menu Cancel the menu Main remote control unit operation buttons 38 Confirm the setting Return to previous menu Making Detailed Settings Manual Setup ei For details on how to select set and cancel settings for each menu see GUI Menu Operation ICS page 26 Set when changing Audyssey Auto Setup settings or when changing the audio video display or other settings e f you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey Auto Setup it will not be possible to select MultEQ XT Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume 1 pages 92 93 e Can be used without changing the settings Please set if necessary e See pages 29 30 for GUI Menu Map and GUI Menu Operation Items that can be set with the Manual Setup procedure Making the speaker settings Speaker Setup page 39 Making the HDMI settings HDMI Setup page 43 Making the audio settings Audio Setup gt page 44 Making the network settings Network Setup 1 page 46 Making the Multi zone settings Zone Setup z page 52 Making other settings Option Setup gt page 53 Making language settings Language 1 page 57 Gu Default settings are underlined Making the Speaker Settings Speaker Setup Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey Auto Setup Change power amp assignment to suit the speaker system configuration Amp Assign L Examples of Amp Assi
203. hear The RESTORER function generates the signals eliminated upon compression restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer sound with compressed audio signals e This is displayed on the GUI menu and can be set when the input source is set to TUNER XM HD Radio or NET USB or when analog signals including FM AM signals or PCM signals fs 44 1 48 kHz are Input Audio Delay While viewing video manually adjust the time to delay audio output Oms 200ms e This can be set within the range of to 100 ms when Auto Lip Sync is set to ON and when a TV compatible with Auto Lipsync is connected e Store Audio Delay for each input source Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality Audio Video Adjust Adjusting the Picture Quality Picture Adjust GUI Default settings are underlined e This can be set when the input source is NET USB X With input sources other than the ones above this can be set when Video Select is selected In this case the original input source settings are called out e Can be set when the Video Convert setting I page 60 is ON Setting items Setting contents Contrast 6 0 6 Adjust picture contrast Brightness 0 12 Adjust picture brightness
204. helf space available to support the addition of height speakers Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories DTS Surround DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS Inc compatible with a sampling frequency of 44 1 or 48 kHz and up to 5 1 channels of digital discrete surround sound DTS HD High Resolution Audio DIS HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS DTS ES and DTS 96 24 signals formats compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7 1 channels of discrete digital sound High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound This format is fully compatible with conventional products including conventional DTS digital surround 5 1 channel data DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD Master Audio is DTS Inc s lossless audio format compatible with up to 96 kHz 7 1 channels The lossless audio coding technology faithfully reproduces the sound of the studio master It is fully compatible with conventional products including conventional DTS digital surround 5 1 channel data DTS ES Discrete 6 1 DTS ES Discrete 6 1 is a 6 1 channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back SB channel to the DTS digital surround sound Decoding of conventional 5 1 channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder DTS ES
205. hen Performing Audyssey Auto Setup Over Again Press AV to select Retry and then press ENTER L When Measuring has Stopped Press RETURN the Cancel auto setup prompt is displayed Press 1 gt and select Yes then press ENTER Main remote control unit SEARCH Cancel the menu Make the Optimal Speaker Settings and Correct the Room Acoustics Audyssey Auto Setup Error messages examples avovssev AUTO SETUP 02277 DENON Caution 1 2 3 456 The subwoofer s level is too high or low Please select SW Level Matching and adjust the level of your subwoofer unit If you do not want to use the subwoofer select Skip AUTO SETUP __ Caution No microphone or speaker EN Cancel E AU gt AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP Caution Ambient noise is too high or Level is too low Error contents e Correct measurement is not possible due to inappropriate subwoofer volume e Included setup microphone is not connected e Not all speakers could be detected e he front L speaker was not properly detected oo much noise in the room for accurate measurements to be made e Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for accurate measurements to be made Measures e When using a subwoofer with built in amplifier active type use SW Level Matching to adjust the subwoofer volume I page 38 eWhen using a subwoofer without a built in amplifier select Skip and then press EN
206. hen using EXT IN input ON Set e OFF Do not set Usually use in this mode Set this to ON if the subwoofer channel level seems too high when playing audio signal Subwoofer Turn subwoofer output on and off e ON The subwoofer is used e OFF The subwoofer is not used Default Restores all the surround parameter settings to their defaults No Do not reset to the defaults e Yes Reset to the defaults Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu 91 yoeqheld Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality Audio Video Adjust v lt T Setting items Setting contents Setting items Setting contents Tone Tone Control Sets the tone control function ON and OFF Audyssey Settings Dynamic EQ Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as Adjust the tonal quality of ON Allow tone adjustment treble bass Continued volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room the sound e OFF Playback without tone adjustment acoustics Z e ON Use the Dynamic EQ equalizer e This can be set when Dynamic EQ I page 92 is set to OFF e he tone cannot be adjusted in the direct mode Bass Adjust low frequency range bass e 6dB 6dB This can be set when Tone Control is set to ON Treble Adjust high frequency range treble e 6dB 6dB This can be set when To
207. hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice When the MAIN Device Select button is pressed only the set zone can be operated with the main remote control unit Remote Control Unit Press 9 7 and 3 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the backlight Press MAIN to light the MAIN zone indicator on time setting mode 15 set 1 Set the light on time The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Settable times 1 5 sec 2 10 sec Default Press 9 9 and 9 in that order Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice x 15 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the backlight k d Sec on time setting mode is set 25 sec Press 1 4 to set The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Settable items Adjusting the Backlight S Brightness 1 When only using MACRO 2 When using MAIN Z2 MACRO using WAIN DIS T MACRO A When usna MAIN AC Default The display s brightness can be adjusted in 5 steps Default Step 5 Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press CHANNEL or CHANNEL The display gets one step brighter when CHANNEL is pressed The display gets one step darker when C
208. ider sound 60 7 3 Delay Time Adjust delay time to control sound stage size 0ms 300ms 30ms Effect Switch effect signal for multi surround speakers on and off e ON Create a wider sound stage e OFF The effect is not set Effect Level Adjust effect signal level e1 15 10 P Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround signals seems unnatural Room Size Determine size of acoustic environment e Small Simulate acoustics of a small room Medium small Simulate acoustics of a medium small room Medium Simulate acoustics of a medium room Medium large Simulate acoustics of a medium large room e Large Simulate acoustics of a large room Room Size does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are played RCH Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Displaying the menu Cancel the menu Confirm the setting Return to previous menu Setting items Surround Parameters Continued Setting contents Front Height Set the Dolby PLIIz Height mode to ON or OFF e ON Switch to Dolby PLIIz Height mode e OFF Do not switch to Dolby Height mode e Front Height is not displayed with the settings listed below e When Amp Assign Extra Channel I 41 is set to FH e When the Speaker Configuration Front Height setting 87 page 42 is set to None e When Surround Mo
209. iginal screen Recently Played Internet Radio Stations Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from Recently Played Up to 20 stations stored in Recently Played Press AV to select Recently Played then press ENTER or gt Press A V to select the item you want to play then press ENTER or gt Search Stations by Keyword Alphabetic Strings 1 Press A V to select Search by Keyword then press ENTER or P The search display appear Search by Keyword Enter Station Submit 2 Enter the characters then press ENTER Presetting Internet Radio Stations Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly While the Internet radio station you want to preset is playing press MEMO 2 Press A V to select Preset then press ENTER 3 Press A G then press 1 8 to select the desired preset number 4 Press MEMO again to complete the setting The Internet radio station is now preset If registered at a number that has already been preset the previously registered setting is cleared Listening to Preset Internet Radio Stations After pressing A G press 1 8 to select the registered preset number The AVR 4810CI automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen so when a station Is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in ea
210. in volume level between television programs commercials and between the soft and loud passages of movies Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically the perceived bass response tonal balance surround impression and dialog clarity remain the same Setting Set Dynamic Volume equalizer effect e Midnight High setting affects volume the most causing all sounds to be of equal loudness e Evening Middle setting prevents loud and soft sounds from being much louder and softer respectively than average sounds e Day Low setting provides the least adjustments to the loudest and softest of sounds Can be set when Dynamic Volume is set to ON Dynamic Volume Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between IV movies and other content between quiet passages and loud passages etc by automatically adjusting to the user s preferred volume setting e ON Use the Dynamic Volume equalizer The Dynamic Volume effect will be at the level of the Setting I page 93 e OFF Do not use the Dynamic Volume equalizer eem is displayed when set to ON e When MultEQ XT is set to OFF Dynamic Volume is automatically set to OFF e You can also press DYNAMIC VOLUME on the main remote control unit to set Dynamic EQ Volume ON Dynamic ON Volume OFF DUI Did NLA NA T ES Gree
211. ion treatments etc please reconnect once again Power switches off suddenly while you are using the AVR 4810 the power indicator will flash red at intervals of approximately 0 5 seconds e he AVR 4810CI amplifier circuit has failed Switch off the power and please contact the DENON service adviser Even applying power the power display flashes red at intervals of approximately 0 5 seconds from the AVR 4810C and at an angle of within 30 e Remove the obstacle between the AVR 4810CI and the remote control unit e Insert the batteries in the proper direction checking the and marks e The set s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light direct sunlight inverter type fluorescent bulb light etc Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light e Make sure the remote control IDs of the main unit and remote 55 112 119 control unit match If the IDs do not match AVAMP is the main unit s remote control ID appears on the AVR 4810CI display when the remote control unit is operated e Set the remote control unit s function button properly Audio Symptom Cause Countermeasure No sound is produced from center speaker No sound is produced from surround speakers No sound is produced from surround back Speaker e When playing monaural audio sources select a surround mode other than STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround e Se
212. ion key security key as used for access point Cancel Enter encryption key Use A V D to input the Key encryption key and press ENTER Enter the same encryption key as used for the access point The types of characters that can be input are as shown below Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Symbols 1 amp 2 Q NM Numbers 0123456789 Space e You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input e When no security settings have been used in the Internet connection settings this step is not necessary 4 When encryption is by WEP select the Default Key using V and then press lt b 1 2 3 4 Select the same default key as used for the access point This should normally be set to 1 Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu operation buttons Displaying the menu Cancel the menu EIE LES HET Setting items Network Connecting Continued Setting contents 5 Use V to select Connection and press ENTER Network connection starts When connection is established with the access point Connection completed is displayed Continued e gt NETWORK CONNECTING Connection completed DHCP ON IP Address 192 168 100
213. ions FM AM Broadcasts Button located on both the main unit Button only on the main unit BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON ENTER TUNING gt lt gt STATUS ee TUNER pe T e 2 p SOURCE SOURCE SELECT 5 SELECT MAIN mode MAIN mode CHANNEL 0 9 SAT TU TUNER MAIN mode MAIN mode 70 SHIFT SHIFT TTT Sub remote control unit TUNER 7887 ISAT TU Listening to FM AM Broadcasts 1 Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select F3 ICS page 31 Set the main remote control unit to the TUNER mode I page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Press BAND to select FM or AM Tune in the desired broadcast station D To tune in automatically Auto Tuning Press MODE to select AUTO then use TU A or TU V to select the station you want to hear 2 To tune in manually Manual Tuning Press MODE to select MANUAL then use TU A or TU V 5 Adjust the items below 1 Adjusting the master volume z page 85 2 Selecting the surround mode page 87 SAT TU Ager TU A _1 Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality Iz amp page 90 TUA _ TU Y e f the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning tune it in manually
214. irm the XM Mini Tuner is fully seated in the ACQUIRING The signal cannot be received Reposition your SiriusConnect dock and check the XM Mini Tuner dock cable is connected to the SIGNAL is displayed Home Tuner and Home Dock antenna AVR 4810Cl e Displays while SiriusConnect Home Tuner is connected Reposition CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini Tuner Dock or your SiriusConnect Home Tuner and Home Dock antenna is displayed the XM antenna cable is damaged Check that the XM antenna Is securely connected to the XM Mini Tuner Dock and check the antenna cable for damage Replace the XM antenna if the cable is SUBSCRIPTION e While updating contract information damaged UPDATED is NO SIGNAL is The signal cannot be received Reposition your XM Mini Tuner displayed displayed and Home Dock antenna Enter Lock Code e Selected channels are locked Please insert pass word 4 digits NM OFF AIR is e The selected channel is not currently broadcasting Select another 1 is displayed into displayed channel After scroll displays Call 888 539 twice displays Call SIRIUS Receiving only XM e The XM Mini Tuner is not activated Contact XM Radio M a channels 0 and 1 XM is e he selected channel is not available The channel may have been displayed reassigned to a different channel number This message may occur initially with a new radio or a radio that has not rece
215. is mode is for enjoying surround effects using only the front speakers or headphones For details see page 127 When playing sources recorded in monaural in the MONO MOVIE mode the sound will be off balance with a single channel left or right so input to both channels Depending on the program source being played it may not be possible to achieve a satisfactory surround effect In this case try other modes to achieve a sound field suited to your tastes 88 Selecting the Surround Surround 4 Stereo Playback This is the mode for playing in stereo The tone can be adjusted Sound 15 output from the front left and right soeakers and subwoofer 1 Playing the source 12857 page 66 2 Press DIRECT STEREO to select the STEREO 5 Playing the Pure Direct Mode This is the mode that recreates the original sound most faithfully providing extremely high quality sound 1 Playing the source 12857 page 66 2 Press PURE DIRECT To cancel press PURE DIRECT again e During playback in PURE DIRECT mode the surround parameters are the same as in DIRECT mode e Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the PURE DIRECT mode When in the PURE DIRECT mode the GUI menu display is not displayed and the display on the main unit is turned off 89 G D u sbunjes v 2 lt D T o UOZ
216. is output from each speaker e Position and connect all speakers before commencing Audyssey Auto Setup STEP2 Speaker Detection 1 Select Measure and then press ENTER gj Bj STEP2 Speaker Detection gt AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP AK 1 2 3456 Please place the microphone at ear height at main listening position 1 Measure the subwoofer level X To stop measuring select Cancel and then press ENTER X When Subwoofer is set to Skip with Channel Skip this measurement is not taken and the process proceeds to 2 Measure each speaker 2 Measure each speaker Once the measurements in step are complete the measurements in step 2 start automatically X The measuring channel changes depending on the setting of Amp Assign I page 39 41 and Channel Skip 8 page 34 When an error message is displayed check Error Messages for details I page 37 3 Check the speaker detection results When measuring ends the speaker detection displayed X Select Next Measurement and press ENTER to proceed to X Press A to select Retry and when you press ENTER measuring at the main listening position starts again results are Main remote control unit SEARCH Cancel the menu Displaying the menu 2 Move the setup microphone to position 2 select Measure and then press ENTER The measurement of the 2nd position starts AUTOSETUP
217. ith an HDMI cable if the monitor is not compatible with HDMI audio signal playback only the video signals are output to the monitor e he audio signals input from the analog digital and EXT IN connectors are not output to the monitor e When control dock for iPod is used as the input source assignment of the HDMI input terminal is disabled even if it is assigned e When HDMI Control Control IG page 44 is set to ON HDMI input terminal cannot be assigned to TV Making the Input Settings Source Select Setting items Setting contents Digital X Upon purchase the settings of the different input sources are as shown Continued below m Pm m CT setting 1 2 source EE vm su setting Nhen control dock for iPod is used as the input source assignment of the digital input terminal is disabled even if it is assigned Digital Set this to change the digital input terminals assigned to the input sources he SIRIUS ovo HOP rv J sar cBL ver J pvr vaux Cp input sources are assigned to the digital input terminals as shown below COAX 1 COAXIAL COAX 2 COAX 3 OPT 1 OPTICAL OPT 2 OPT 3 D LINK DENON LINK D LINK is set when the AVR 4810CI is connected by DENON LINK to a DENON Blu ray disc DVD player I page 23 Components Equipped with a DENON LINK Connector None Do not assign a digital input terminal to the selected input source component CON Te
218. ived XM s signal for an extended period Consult the latest channel guide at www xmradio com or www xmradio ca for the current UPGRADE XM e The connected XM Mini Tuner is not compatible with the AVR TUNER is displayed 4810Cl Please use an XM Rev4x compatible XM Mini Tuner Played sound is interrupted or sound cannot be played E 22 o gt 5 list of channels For cases of a new radio a radio that has not received XM s signal for an extended period allow the radio to receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again CH UNAVAILABLE e Channel is not present Select another channel is displayed 133 Restoring All the Settings to as They were at the Time of Purchase Resetting the Microprocessor Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed When the microprocessor is reset all the settings are reset to their default values STANDARD DSP SIMULATION suonoeuuo poyeys 6unjer lt POWER gt 9U0Z 1 NIAj 1 sbunjeg 3 1 Turn off the power using lt POWER gt 5 S Press POWER while simultaneously pressing STANDARD and lt DSP S SIMULATION d Once the display starts flashing at intervals of about 1 second release the two 3 buttons If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 sec
219. k code 4 digits using A V lt P and press ENTER Input new lock code 4 digits using A V lt D and press ENTER Input new lock code 4 digits again using A V lt P and press ENTER Press A V to select Execute and then press ENTER If the correct password is input Completed is displayed and the new password is modified e f the old password is incorrectly input Current Lock Code is incorrect is displayed and proceed again from step 1 elf the password input is digits or less Enter 4 digits number is displayed and input again with a 4 digit password e f the new password is not correctly input New Lock Codes do not Match is displayed and the password does not change Edit Lock Code Change the password oF WN RCH Main remote control unit Displaying the menu Sa Moves the cursor 65 Up Down Left Right re Confirm the setting Return to previous menu Cancel the menu operation buttons Playback v 9 lt T A gt 30 Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit BUTTON Button only on the main unit BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON ENTER 6 lt ON STANDBY gt A V lt D lt STATUS gt 66 6 iPod 1 1 gt
220. l configuration e 5 1ch 7 1ch 9 1ch 11 1ch Continued Extra Channel Select the channels to be used from among surround back speakers SB front height speakers FH front wide speakers FW When setting Configuration to 7 1ch e SB FH FW When setting Configuration to 9 1ch e SB FH SB FW FH FW Assign Select power amp usage method NORMAL This is the usual configuration e 22 Assign a power amp to ZONE2 audio e 22 23 Assign a power amp to ZONE2 and ZONES audio e ALL Z2 Assign all power amps to ZONE2 audio e ALL Z24Z3 Assign all power amps to ZONE2 and ZONES audio e FREE Freely assign power amps to the desired channels Front Select front speaker connection method NORMAL This is the usual configuration e Bi WIRING Bi wire the front speakers e Bi AMP Bi amp the front speakers e 2CH BW Bi wire another front speaker for 2 channel play mode 2CH BA Bi amp another front speaker for 2 channel play mode Speaker Configuration Select speaker configuration and size bass reproduction capability Select Large or Small not according the physical size of the speaker but according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities based on the frequency set at Crossover Frequency IS page 43 Front Set the front speaker size e Large Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies e Small Use of a
221. l speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies e None Select when the front height speakers are not connected Nhen Configuration is set to 5 1ch in the Amp Assign settings I page 41 or when is not selected using Extra Channel no settings can be made for Front Height Front Wide Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers e Large Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies e Small Use of a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies e None Select when the front wide speakers are not connected Nhen Configuration is set to 5 1ch in the Amp Assign settings I page 41 or when FW is not selected using Extra Channel settings can be made for Front Wide Bass Setting Settings for subwoofer and LFE signal range playback Subwoofer Mode Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer eLFE Ihe low range signal of the channel set to Small speaker size is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer e LFE Main The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer e This can be set when Speaker Configuration Subwoofer IG page 41 is set to Yes e Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass e Select LFE Main if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the
222. layback Mode JJ Input Assign 1 Video 1 Input Mode Rename 1 Source Level Audio Video Adjust I 90 Adjust various audio and video parameters 21 Audio Adjust 1 Picture Adjust 1 Still Picture Auto Preset J Preset Skip 1 Preset Name _J Parental Lock Antenna Aiming Manual Setup 1257 page 39 Make detailed settings for various parameters J Speaker Setup 2 HDMI Setup 2 Audio Setup 2 Network Setup J Zone Setup 2 Option Setup Volume Control Source Delete e GUI Remote Preset Codes Quick Select Name Zone Rename Trigger Out 1 Trigger Out 2 Option Setup Continued Remote SIRIUS XM Remote ID 232C Port Dimmer Setup Lock Maintenance Mode Firmware Update Add New Feature d Language 29 o Ke 7 GUI Menu Operation GUI e When a TV is connected to the AVR 4810CI the GUI menu sound Es field parameters etc can be displayed on the TV Examples of GUI Menu Screen Displays Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual This allows you to operate the AVR 4810Cl and make settings on it Typical d bed bel while looking at the GUI menu displayed on the TV e Operate with the main remote control unit switched to the MAIN mode I page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Exam le 1 Menu selection screen Top menu Press MENU The GUI menu is disp
223. layed on the TV screen lt SOURCE SELECT gt ENTER Press AV gt to select the menu to be set or operated To return to the previous item press 1 or RETURN Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit BUTTON Button only on the main unit BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON o e gt 2 VCR iPod DVR i V AUX NET USB Favorites B 4 3 Press ENTER to enter the setting Exiting the GUI Menu Press MENU while the GUI menu is displayed The GUI menu display disappears 1 g List GUI menu setup icons Currently selected setup icon Currently selected setup item List of currently selected setup items Guide text for the currently selected setup item AV D MENU RETURN Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title Items for which this mark is indicated at the title can be operated from the GUI We recommend performing such operations from the GUI Press V to select DY and then press gt Or press ENTER AEN Making Detailed Settings GUI Manual Setup NTER gt SURROUND MODE RETURN SOURCE b STEREO ES 7 SELECT This is the GUI icon for this setting DIRECT Terum D item or for the menu series to which SETS MEO INPUT this ite
224. ll the front Front speaker Front height speaker Front wide speaker Center speaker or rear Surround speaker Surround Back speaker speakers at once Use V to select Fader then select the item to be adjusting using lt or Use lt gt to adjust the volume of the speakers lt front D rear I e The fader function does not affect the subwoofer e The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker adjusted to the lowest value is 12 dB Convenient Functions Saving Frequently Used Settings Quick Select Function All of the settings in step 1 can be memorized together By memorizing frequently used settings you can quickly access and enjoy a playback environment that is consistently the same Saving the Settings Set the items below to the settings you want to save D Input Source i page 31 2 Volume Level i gt page 85 3 Surround Mode I page 87 4 Audyssey Setting MultEQ XT Dynamic EQ Dynamic Volume 2 page 92 93 5 Video Select 5 page 60 Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT until Memory appears on the display The current settings will be memorized Quick Select Defaults Input Source Volume Quick Select 1 40dB Quick Select 2 SAT CBL 40dB Quick Select 3 A0dB Calling the Settings Out Press QUICK SELECT at which the settings you want to call out are saved The 91 Q2 or Q3 indicator lights on
225. lowing the and marks in the battery compartment e o prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid e Do not use a new battery together with an old one e Do not use two different types of batteries e Do not attempt to charge dry batteries e Do not short circuit disassemble heat or dispose of batteries in flames e f the battery fluid should leak carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries e Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods e Used batteries should be disposed of in accordance with the local regulations regarding battery disposal Burner Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it Approx 23 feet 7 m RC 1126 The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared light e d gt ae o e mi Q Part Names and Functions Front Panel For buttons not explained here see the page indicated in parentheses Power operation button 28 Power indicator amp ON ELOFF 28 Power switch
226. lt gt STATUS a TU SEARCH lt gt CHANNEL 72 0 9 rome L IN 1 2 eee ia mr 1 AI 1 1 1 w a AZ nee mmm jar SAT TU SHIFT 7 79 Sub remote control unit SAT TU Maes A 6 Sc eae ene ICE TU A v T c MEMO s Avap my eO CHANNEL je SOURCE MAIN mode SELECT SAT TU MAIN mode Presetting Radio Channels Preset Memory Your favorite broadcast channels can be preset so that you can tune them in easily Up to 56 stations can be preset 1 Tune in the broadcast channel you want to preset 2 Press MEMO Press A G to select the block in which the channel is to be preset then press CHANNEL or 1 8 to select the preset number The memory block can also be selected by pressing SHIFT on the sub remote control unit 4 Press MEMO again to complete the setting To preset other channels repeat steps 1 to 4 Preset channels are erased by overwriting them Listening to Preset Channels 1 Press A G to select the memory block Press CHANNEL or 1 8 to select the desired preset channel You can also operate via the main unit In this case perform the following operations Press TUNING gt then turn SOURCE SELECT to select the preset ra
227. lti zone Zone Rename Power Select Source Volume Level Audio Input Signal Shows information audio input signals about Surround Mode The currently set surround mode Signal The input signal type fs The input signal s sampling frequency Format The number of channels in the input signal front surround LFE Offset The dialogue normalization correction value Flag This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back channel MATRIX is displayed with Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES Matrix signals DISCRETE with DTS ES Discrete signals Dialogue normalization function This is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital sources This function automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources The correction value can be checked using the STATUS on the main unit The figure is the correction value when the standard level is corrected Quick Select Shows information about Saving Frequently Used Settings Quick Select Function 101 settings Quick Select 1 Quick Select 2 Quick Select 3 ZONE2 Quick Select ZONES Quick Select ZONE4 Quick Select e Select Source Video Select MultEQ XT Dynamic EQ Dynamic Volume Auto Surround Mode Analog PCM 2ch Digital 2ch Digital 5 1ch Multi ch Volume Level Preset Channel Shows information about preset channels This can be checked when the input sour
228. lts No Do not reset to the defaults Crossover Frequency Outputs at below set frequency each speaker s bass signal output from the subwoofer Set this according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities of the speakers you are using 40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz Set the crossover frequency Advanced Specify crossover frequency for each speaker e Front Center Surround Surround Back Front Height Front Wide Select the speaker e 40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz Set the crossover frequency e Can be set when the Speaker Configuration Subwoofer I page 41 setting is Yes or when you have a speaker that is set to Small e Always set the crossover frequency to 80Hz When using small speakers however we recommend setting the crossover frequency to a higher frequency e For speakers set to Small sound below the crossover frequency is cut from the sound output The cut bass sound is output from the subwoofer or front speakers e The speakers that can be set when Advanced is selected differ according to the Subwoofer Mode setting I page 42 eWhen LFE is selected speakers set to Small at Speaker Configuration can be set If the speakers are set to Large Full Band is displayed and the setting cannot be made elf set to LFE Main this setting can be made regardless of the
229. ly to connect the iPod to the AVR 4810CI For instructions on the control dock for iPod settings refer to the control dock for iPod s operating instructions Turntable MM cartridge CD player AUDIO AUDIO COAXIAL Control dock for iPod gt D T i w 3 SAT CBL 4 CR 4 E J DIGITAL ASSIGN 7 9 N X Tu 2 D TR i N DVD HDP 9 YS 5 iPod 6 MONITOR 6 DIGITAL ASSIGN JG B EIE o oJ o oJ 2 NS qum lt NA 170 m 0 2000 Te Um 2 NEL NIA X NEAN e o en dics AUDIO DVD TV l ZONES RF W SBR gui eR TUNER pr si sS 8 eal SIL SIRIUS Nes SATTU 1 e e A 5 XH A o SIRIUS gos B A J H B g je 1 4 ANTENNA des MONITOR El z d TUNE n AM Vb AME Ex a REMOTE C Bj ROLY Y DN 1 p JE m E n NEY NEY DOO 52 P Y 7 un REMOTE CONTROL Lv UN 1 3 2p s Ss m a SPEAKERS ROOM TO ROOM 0 12V lil Ls TS lt TS SPEAKERS A oe ee Q SIGNAL AUD SAT CBL VCR Pod 9 VCR DWR FR sw SR SE O9 OQ PHONO GND D FRONT 8 TE SIGNAL TUNER els a PHONO AUDIO IGNA SIR Er SS COAX
230. m 20045 20048 20081 20616 jenen PE FAS Ree 42967 hem 40000 40032 40087 40179 Broksonic 20348 Jensen 20067 Philips 20618 20739 mm qm ea eue 40420 40468 Calix 20037 JVC 20067 21162 mm A Revox 40157 Candle 20037 KEC 20037 20278 DMX Electronics 40157 Pioneer 20042 20067 20081 21337 Rotel 40157 40420 Carrera 20240 Kenwood 20067 Fisher 40000 40179 Polk Audio 20081 S SAE 40157 Carver 20081 Kodak 20037 Garrard 40393 40420 Portland 20278 Sansui 40000 40157 20278 LG 20037 20240 21137 40032 Presidian 21593 Sanyo 40000 40087 40179 Cineral 20278 Lifetec 20348 Grundig 40157 TEE Profitronic 20240 Sears 40179 CineVision 21137 Linksys 21972 Hafler 40173 20060 40100 40157 40173 Sharp 40037 Citizen 20037 20240 20278 Lloyd s 20240 Pulsar 20240 20278 d Sonic Frontiers 40157 Classic 20037 Loewe 20081 Hitachi 40032 Pulser 20240 Sony 40000 40100 40185 40490 Colortyme 20045 20060 20278 Logik 20240 Inkel 40157 TE ae mm rma s Um Quasar 20226 21162 Integra 40101 Bid RadioShack 20037 20048 20240 21162 Sylvania 40157 Crosley 20081 LXI 20037 20042 20067 Jerrold 40003 Radix 20037 T McLaren 40157 Crown 20278 M Electronic 20240 NG 40032 is Math 20060 20240 20278 7 20037 20240 20278 20593 icis eus 40000 40028 40029 40037 n Curtis Mathes 0060 20240 Rum ite MEN ETS 20042 20045 20048 20060 Kenwood 40190 40681
231. m belongs neural SOURCE pos I MULTI CH STEREO SELECT EE VCR DVR UE CD PHONO Stereo playback mode with tone controls 6 Selected setup icon 7 Options of the selected setup item 30 GUI Menu Operation Example 2 Audyssey Auto Setup screen with illustration Selecting the Input Source There are three ways to select the input source as described below D Selecting the input source using the Source Select menu GUI menu 2 Selecting the input source using the INPUT SOURCE SELECT Main remote control unit 3 Selecting the input source using the SOURCE SELECT Main unit STEPI Preparation 1 10 Ej Connect the speakers and place them according to the recommendations in the manual 1 Set the following items if necessary Amp Assign Channel Skip Auto Setup Start D Using the Source Select Menu Switch the main remote control unit to the MAIN or MACRO mode when performing this operation I page 108 Operating the i Main Remote Control Unit If the main remote control unit is in ZONE2 ZONES or ZONEA mode the Source Select menu will not be displayed when SOURCE SELECT is pressed 8 History icon 9 Operation guidance text 10 Operation step indicators 11 Illustration 12 Guide text for the currently selected setup item Operation button guidance Press SOURCE SELECT Display the Source Select
232. main unit BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON AV lt MASTER VOLUME v lt T PHONES jack ENTER STATUS na 2 Ss H MASTER MUTE AV Ja 4 1 la a gt RES Sub Le unit 84 Select the Search Mode Rhapsody 1 4 DENON Rhapsody Music Guide 8 0 Search ig Rhapsody Channels in My Library ur D Search From Rhapsody Latest Information 1 Use AV to select Rhapsody Music Guide then press ENTER or Use A V to select the information for track selection then press ENTER or gt After selecting the information is displayed Use AV to select the track then press ENTER or 2 Enter a Character Search For the Track You Want to Listen to 1 Use A V to select Search then press ENTER or Use A V to select the search item then press ENTER The search display appears X You can search by artist name album name track name keyword 3 Enter the characters then press ENTER 3 Search From the Rhapsody Internet Radio Station Use A V to select Rhapsody Channels then press ENTER or gt Use A V to select radio station then press ENTER or D 4 Listening to Tracks Registered In My Library Use A V to select My Library then press ENTER or D Use AV to select the
233. mp lt gt QG NM 4I Y Numbers 0123456789 Space e You can change the character type when press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input e When no security settings have been used in the Internet connection settings this step is not necessary 5 When encryption is by WEP select the Default Key using V and then press lt b 1 2 3 4 Select the same default key as used for the access point This should normally be set to 1 Make settings manually v Cancel Manually enter SSID 48 Main remote control unit operation buttons Displaying the menu Moves the cursor Cancel the menu Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu EIE LES HET ES EST Setting items Setting contents Setting items Setting contents Network Connecting 6 Use V to select Connection and press ENTER Network Connecting D On the GUI menu select Network Connecting Detail and Continued Network connection starts Continued press ENTER When connection is established with the access point Connection completed is displayed e gt NETWORK CONNECTING Connection completed DHCP ON IP Address 192 168 100 85 Detail Enter Terminate setup AVR 4810Cl performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function When connecting to a network without a DHCP function you will need to manually config
234. mp page 63 Making the Settings to Play Still Pictures Still Picture 3 page 63 Automatically Presetting Radio Stations Auto Preset I page 63 Setting Preset Channels so that They are not Displayed When Tuning Preset Skip IG page 63 Giving Names to Preset Stations Preset Name I page 64 Check the XM Radio and SIRIUS Radio Reception Sensitivity Antenna Aiming ICS page 64 Setting SIRIUS Radio Reception Restrictions Parental Lock I page 65 Confirm the setting Return to previous menu 57 o gt ae 2 o gt Making the Input Settings Source Select J Input Assignments Menu Operations Important Information pu Ig u Operati About the Display of Input Sources in This Manual Press MENU 4 Use gt to move the gray The GUI menu is displayed on the TV highlight to the item you want to set In this manual the names of input sources that can be set at the different items are indicated as shown screen below Use AV select SOURCE Bay gt Ar INPUT ASSIGN 1 2 DENON DVD SAT CBL DVR V AUX NET USB SELECT the press ENTER or P Default cow iod HDMI1 COAXI 1 RCA None HDMI2 2 RCA None Internet Radio Media Server USB iPod Napster Rhapsody TUNER sirius HD Radio NOTE Input sources that have been set to Delete at Source Delete 187 page 53 cannot be sele
235. ms below 1 Adjusting the master volume I amp page 85 d Selecting the surround mode tz page 87 2 Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality I page 90 Q A C DN 1 To stop F page 85 L Searching pages iz page 86 L Searching by first letter lt gt page 86 Listening to Internet Radio P e There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet and the quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the tracks varies widely Generally the higher the bit rate the higher the sound quality but depending on the communication lines and server traffic the music or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted Inversely lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less tendency for the sound to be interrupted e Server Full or Connection Down is displayed if the station is busy or not broadcasting e On the AVR 4810CI folder and file names can be displayed as titles Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with period e Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound RESTORER IG page 94 The default setting is Mode 3 e When STATUS is pressed the display can be switched between the title name and radio station name e he time default 30 sec for which the GUI menu are displayed can be set at GUI menu GUI NET USB 57 page 53 Press AV D to return to the or
236. multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room make en Device select LA E a ru DEVICE this setting so that only the desired AV receiver operates um button NET USB E EP SELECTOR IE js amen c ndi NETUS i EM ececcu f MAIN 1 Press MAIN to light the MAIN zone indicator TU AV Switching picture Li a Direct play Rhapsody MAIN LE n amp iPod Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice oe the 5 digit number corresponding to the remote ID SELECT to be changed MASTER The signal transmission indicator flashes twice VOLUME Press SAT TU TUNER iPod DTU or NET USB MUTE to select the mode to be set 0 9 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the remote IDs for all RC SETUP modes DEVICE SELECTOR SATTU NET MAIN SIRIUS TUNER iPod DTU USB Signal XM transmission Remote ID indicator ae 81001 52415 62863 72815 62840 62865 DEVICE SELECTOR 38 88001 52417 62276 72817 62842 62838 84001 52418 62277 72818 62843 62839 X c POWER ef 3 Refer to the table at the right and use 0 9 to input MENU Page Search SEARCH Character Search AVA ENTER SETUP RSTR RESTORER CH Preset channel selection Preset channel selec
237. n Red Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu Audyssey DSX Settings Adjust DSX setting sound stage parameters and DSX Provides more immersive surround sound by adding the new channels e ON Set Audyssey DSX to expand surround e OFF Do not set Audyssey DSX Stage Width Adjust sound stage width when using front wide speakers 10 0 Stage Height Adjust sound stage height when using front height speakers e 10 0 e 5 can be set when you using front height speakers or front wide speakers e DSX is valid when using a center speaker e DSX is valid when surround mode is STANDARD mode other than PLIIz Height e DSX can be operated by DSX on the main unit and SPEAKER on the e Stage Width cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being played includes front wide channels Stage Height cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being played includes front height channels In these case the respective channels are played back using the input signals Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu 93 yoeqheld v lt T Adjusting the Sound Picture Quality Audio Video Adjust Setting items Audyssey DSX Settings Continued Setting contents About Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion DSX Audyssey DSX is a scalable surr
238. n remote control unit for the device you want to preset 2 Press and hold in RC SETUP on the main remote control unit for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice 3 Enter a 5 digit code using 0 9 on the main remote control unit When the code is registered the signal transmission indicator flashes twice Displaying the menu Cancel the menu 54 Main remote control unit operation buttons Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu Making Detailed Settings Manual Setup Setting items Remote Preset Codes Continued Setting contents 4 Check if the device is operating with the registered preset code If the device does not operate try registering a different preset code 5 Press MAIN on the main remote control unit to set the remote control to MAIN mode The main unit can also be operated with MENU AV 1 gt ENTER Quick Select Name Change the Quick Select display title to one you prefer 1 Use A V to select the name of the Quick Select setting you want to change then press gt or ENTER 2 Use lt gt to set the cursor to the character you want to change 3 Use A V to change the character then press ENTER e Up to 16 characters can be input e You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input e The types of characters that can be input
239. n s ID The strength of both the SIRIUS satellite terrestrial signals be checked Antenna Aiming IG page 64 Presetting Radio Channels Preset Memory Your favorite broadcast channels can be preset so that you can tune them in easily Up to 56 channels can be preset 1 Tune in the broadcast channel you want to preset 2 Press MEMO Press A G to select the block in which the channel is to be preset then press CHANNEL or 1 8 to select the preset number yoeqheld The memory block can also be selected by pressing SHIFT on the sub remote control unit 4 Press MEMO again to complete the setting To preset other channels repeat steps 1 to 4 Preset channels are erased by overwriting them Listening to Preset Channels Press CHANNEL to select the desired preset channel then press ENTER Selection is still possible if you press 1 8 after pressing A G You can also operate the main unit In this case perform the following operations Press TUNING then turn SOURCE SELECT gt to select the preset radio channel 73 v lt T Tuning Radio Stations SIRIUS Satellite Radio lt SOURCE SELECT gt Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit gt BUTTON Button only on the main unit
240. n 20060 40000 40032 40179 40420 Audiovox 20037 20278 Instant Replay 20226 Sup 20240 Tisoni 20278 i ISONIC ieee ral 40468 B Beaumark 20240 ITT Nokia 20240 Pentax 20042 PRESET CODE 2 Tio 20618 20636 20739 Philips 20618 20739 Akai 20283 American High 10000 10060 10000 10030 10035 10037 21337 21996 10047 10051 10054 10060 TMK 20240 d C Carver 20028 Amstrad TT ANE Curtis Mathes 10745 10154 10166 10178 S R RCA 20880 D Denon 20076 20371 22471 m Tm 10702 11147 11347 ReplayTV 20614 20616 G Garrard 20308 20240 10009 10178 10264 10623 10634 ocom nam D Daewoo i i 20043 20045 20240 21008 S Samsung 20739 Grundig 20029 n Tees 10661 10672 11661 11755 Toshiba 21972 21996 Sonic Blue 20614 20616 Harman Kardon 20029 20182 TESEO 11756 Tosonic 20278 Sony 20636 21972 J Jvc 20244 20273 m Dayton 10092 Totevision 20037 20240 Stack 9 21972 K Kenwood 20070 TURN TEES Daytron 10030 10036 10092 10178 Touch 21972 Systemax 21972 M Magnavox 20029 remm um Decca meu Trix 20037 T Tagar Systems 21972 Man 20009 20029 m 10092 10623 10802 10875 Dell 11863 U ultra 20045 20278 Tivo 20618 20636 20739 21337 Mitsubishi 20283 aes 11937 11951 11952 Denon 10145 Unitech 20240 Toshiba 21008 21972 21996 O Onkyo 20135 20282 Aventura 10171 resa Vision 11164 V Vector 20045 Touch 2 197 Optimus 20027 20220 Awa 10009 Dumont 10017 10178 Victor 20067 V Viewsonic
241. n Remote Control Unit You can then operate the input source you set in step 1 4 Use TU A or TU V to select the channel When the channel is tuned in the name of the song and artist are displayed Adjust the items below 1 Adjusting the master volume I amp page 85 2 Selecting the surround mode 27 page 87 2 Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality I page 90 e The channel switches continuously when TU A TU V is pressed and held e he song title artist name composer name category and reception level can be checked by pressing STATUS e he time default 30 sec for which the GUI menu are displayed can be set GUI Tuner Ii page 54 Press AV lt 1 gt to return to the original screen Tuning in Radio Stations Checking the SIRIUS Signal Strength and Radio ID Press STATUS until SIGNAL appears on the display The display will switch as shown below depending on the reception conditions Display Status EXCELLENT Signal strength is excellent Signal strength is good WEAK Signal strength is weak NO SIGNAL Adjust the position of the antenna until SIGNAL EXCELLENT is shown on the display Press STATUS until the channel example SR001 is displayed 4 Press TU A or TU V and select channel 0 SR000 Channel No and Sirius ID are alternately shown on the display Sirius ID X Write your own SIRIUS ID for storage use Si
242. n Remote Control Unit 1 On the GUI menu select Remote Preset Codes and press ENTER or 2 Pressing AV select the category of device for preset registration Then press ENTER or gt gt W gt REMOTE PRESET CODES misa du uolo b PVR CABLE Select the device category Setting items Remote Preset Codes Setting contents 3 Pressing AV select the first character of the brand name Then press ENTER or gt X The first character is displayed as 1 A Z In the case of brand names starting with the symbol select A For brand names that start with codes or numbers other than the symbol select 1 gt NE REMOTE PRESET CODES BD HD DVD DVD v PVR SAT PVR CABLE A B C B E F G H Select first letter of device brand 4 Pressing AV select the brand name Then press ENTER or P The procedures for registering remote control codes and remote control preset registration are displayed 1 3 DENON DVD G amp B Haaz Haier Hanseatic Harman Kardon HCM Helios y Previous Next Select the device brand X When there are several pages of brand names the pages can be switched by pressing the main remote control unit s CH or CH when the main remote control unit is in MAIN mode 1 How to carry out preset register See page 109 for details on how to carry out preset registration 1 Press DEVICE DVD HDP VCR DVR TV or SAT CABLE on the mai
243. n and later iPod nano iPod classic and iPod touch audio it is not compatible with iPod shuffle However some functions may be limited on certain models e he operation may not work properly if the iPod s software is old Be sure to use the latest version of iPod software e With iPods non copyrighted material and material for which duplication and playback is authorized by law can be duplicated and played by individuals for their personal enjoyment Infringement of copyrights is prohibited by law e Note that DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with the data on an iPod when using the AVR 4810Cl in conjunction with the iPod Listening to music on an iPod Connect the iPod to the AVR 4810CI s USB port using the USB cable included with the iPod page 24 USB Port Turn the AVR 4810CI power on IG page 28 Turning the Power On v lt AV lt i gt ENTER STATUS SiPod 8 71 Ei NET USB gt ee eee Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select 3 I gt page 31 SEARCH Tes zi Cee SEARCH GUI screen AV lt gt n AV gt DENON s iPod 1 9 DENON ENTER Ge ENTER E Piaylistes SOURCE EE SOURCE quud SELECT SELECT Podcasts MAIN mode MAIN mode E iPod MAIN mode X When the iPod is connected directly to the USB po
244. n listening position e Individual level controls on the back of each subwoofer are set so that each subwoofer plays at the same level e Do not hold the microphone in your hand during measurements e Avoid placing the microphone close to a seat back or wall as sound reflections may give inaccurate results eWhen you use two or three subwoofers please adjust the subwoofer volume controls individually so that each subwoofer level is as close as possible to 75 dB using the test tone 857 42 before Audyssey Auto Setup If the subwoofer level error message appears please select Skip and then press ENTER 33 sbunjes o e gt 7 Make the Optimal Speaker Settings and Correct the Room Acoustics Audyssey Auto Setup Audyssey Auto Setup Preparations jaround items indicate the settings STEP1 Preparation Perform the following settings if adjustments etc are required for the speaker environment you re using If you do not need to perform the following settings or have already completed them select Auto Setup Start and then press ENTER Proceed to STEP2 Change the Amplifier Assignment Amp Assign It is possible to switch the signals being output from the Bi Wir or Bi Amp FRONT S BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE F HEIGHT F WIDE ZONE2 and ZONES speaker terminals on the AVR 4810CI to suit the speaker environment being used IS page 39 41 Amp Assign 66 99 Select Amp
245. n when power is turned on e 80dB 18dB 1 99 The volume is adjusted to the set level Mute Level Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on e Full The sound is muted entirely e 40dB The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down e 20dB sound is attenuated by 20 dB down Source Delete Remove input sources that are not used from the display PHONO CD DVD HDP TV SAT CBL VCR DVR V AUX NET USB TUNER XM SIRIUS HD Radio Select input source that Is not used e ON Use this source Delete Do not use this source e Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted e nput sources set to Delete cannot be selected using SOURCE SELECT GUI Make GUI related settings Screensaver Make screensaver settings e ON The screen saver is activated during GUI menu display or NET USB iPod TUNER XM SIRIUS HD Radio screen display if no operation is performed approximately for a continuous 3 minute period When you press AV lt the screen saver is cancelled and the screen before that screen saver started is displayed Setting items Making Detailed Settings Manual Setup Setting contents Wall Paper Set wallpaper to display the background when playback is stopped etc e Picture Set the background to a picture DENON logo e Black Set the background to black e Gray Set the background to gray e Blue Set the background to blue
246. nce for your home theater e When performing Audyssey Auto Setup the MultEQ XT Dynamic Connect the Included Setup Microphone EQ Dynamic Volume functions become valid I page 92 93 IE page 33 e Use the included setup microphone DM A409 to perform Audyssey Auto Setup e Measurements are performed by placing the setup microphone successively at multiple positions throughout the entire listening area as shown in Example For best results we recommend you measure in 6 or more positions as shown in the illustration page 34 Even if the listening environment is small as shown in Example 2 I Change the Amplifier Assignment Amp Assign measuring at points throughout the listening environment Q When Using the Front Wide Speakers 1257 page 34 M T Set the Channels You will not Use Channel Skip A When Using the Surround Back Speakers Example i Example 2 IS page 34 Audyssey Auto Setup Preparations Example Example FL SW Perform Audyssey Auto Setup IG page 35 Check the Measuring Results and Equalizer Type after Audyssey Auto Setup Parameter Check 1257 page 38 FL Front speaker L C Center speaker FR Front speaker R SW Subwoofer FHL Front height speaker L SL Surround speaker L FHR Front height speaker R SR Surround speaker R FWL Front wide speaker L SBL Surround back speaker L FWR Front wide speaker R SBR Surr
247. ne Control is set to ON Audyssey Settings Set MultEQ XT Dynamic and Dynamic Volume If you have not performed Auto Setup or if you change the speaker settings after performing Auto Setup you may not be able to select Dynamic EQ Dynamic Volume and Run Audyssey may be displayed In this case either perform Audyssey Auto Setup over again or perform Restore I page 38 to return to the settings after Audyssey Auto Setup was run MultEQ XT Corrects both time and frequency response problems in the listening area e Audyssey Optimize the frequency response of all speakers e Audyssey Byp L R Optimize frequency response of speakers except front L and R speakers e Audyssey Flat Optimize frequency response of all speakers to flat response e Manual Apply frequency response set with Manual EQ I 94 e OFF Turn MultEO XT equalizer off e Audyssey Audyssey L R and Audyssey Flat be selected after Audyssey Auto Setup has been performed Audyssey is automatically selected after performing Audyssey Auto Setup When Audyssey Audyssey Byp L R or AudysseyFlat isselected sean lights e After running Audyssey Auto Setup if the Speaker Configuration Distance Channel Level and Crossover Frequency have changed without increasing the number of speakers measured only Aueysser lights e f Dynamic EQ or Dynamic Volume is set
248. nfirm the setting Return to previous menu Cancel the menu operation buttons Making the Input Settings Source Select Giving Names to Preset Stations Preset Name GUI Check the XM Radio and SIRIUS Radio Reception GUI Sensitivity Antenna Aiming Default settings are underlined Default settings are underlined ____ items Settingcontents e his can be set when the input source is xm SIRIUS 1 G8 This can be set when the input source is HD Radio TUNER e Install the antenna with radio reception sensitivity set to maximum Select the preset channel 1 Press gt or ENTER Setting items Setting contents 2 Use 4 gt to set the cursor to the character you want to change Satellite 3 Use A V to change the character then press ENTER 4 When the input source is Indicate satellite signal e Up to 8 characters can be input erent Display Condition e The input character type can be switched by pressing SEARCH on the TID Signal strength is strong main remote control unit or MENU while the display name is being Signal strength is good changed Signal strength is marginal e The types of characters that can be input are as shown below 8 Signal strength is weak Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Terrestrial Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Indicate terrestrial signal When the input source is Symb
249. nnection type HDD of the kind to which an AC adapter can be connected to supply power use the AC adapter e tis not possible to connect and use a computer via the AVR 4810CI s USB port using a USB cable e The AVR 4810CI is not compatible with the iPod shuffle Playing Network Audio USB Memory Devices 81 yoeqheld Playing Network Audio USB Memory Devices Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit _ gt BUTTON Button only on the main unit BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON ENTER STATUS u 9 lt T AV RETURN SOURCE SELECT MAIN mode 82 Listening to Napster Adjust the items below 6 2 Adjusting the master volume I amp page 85 2 Selecting the surround mode zz page 87 J Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality Iz amp page 90 Search From Napster Menu Use A V to select search item or folder then press Playback preparation D Check the network environment then turn on the AVR 4810Cl s power I 26 Connecting to a Home Network LAN 2 If settings are required make the Network Connecting I page 46 Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select I gt page 31 ENTER or gt Use A V to select the track item
250. o copy decompile disassemble reverse engineer hack manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio Systems Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii Using the HD Radio Receiver HD Radio stations offer higher sound quality than conventional FM AM broadcasts It is also possible to receive data services and select broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs HD Radio technology provides higher quality sound than conventional broadcasts and allows reception of data services e FM sounds as sensational as CDs e AM sounds as rich as analog FM stereo A variety of data services including text based information song title artist name album name genre etc can be received Furthermore in addition to conventional broadcasts with HD Radio broadcasting it is possible to choose from up to 8 multicast programs For detailed information on HD Radio technology please go to www iIbiquity com HD Radio HD Radio Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity Digital Corp U S and Foreign Patents HD Radio and the HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp 69 yoeqheld v lt T Tun Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual lt SOURCE SELECT gt and the remote control unit BUTTON ing in Radio Stat
251. oir y acc der facilement FCC Information For US customers COMPLIANCE INFORMATION Product Name AV Surround Receiver Model Number AVR 4810CI This product contains FCC ID PPO NM100BB This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this product may not cause harmful interference and 2 this product must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Denon Electronics USA LLC 100 Corporate Drive Mahwah NJ 07430 2041 Tel 201 762 6500 Main IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modification not expressly approved by DENON may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product CAUTION e To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirement separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this product and all persons e his product and its antenna must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This product generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energ
252. olby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7 1 channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback equipment Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master This format is compatible with a maximum sampling frequency of 96 kHz and up to 7 1 channels so it is used for applications particularly prioritizing sound quality Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into 5 channels to achieve an excellent surround effect The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band signals with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater to create a three dimensional sound image offering a rich sense of presence for all stereo sources 120 Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic IIx is further improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II matrix decoding technology Audio signals recorded in 2 channels are decoded to achieve a natural sound with up to 7 1 channels There are 3 modes Music suited for playing mu
253. old from generation 5 on For details check the DENON web site or page 66 Connecting Devices Component with Multi channel Output connectors External Power Amplifier The video signal can be connected in the same way as a Blu ray Disc eSelect the terminal to use and connect the device player DVD player I page 18 Blu ray Disc Player DVD Player e Connect when using an external power amp or an amp you already have Blu ray Disc player DVD player External decoder Power amplifier AUDIO SUB SUB SUB FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND FRONT WOOFER WOOFER WOOFER BACK HEIGHT L R OO 06 AUDIO SUB FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND WOOFER SAT CBL 4 IONE 2 icon INT VIDEO DTU ANTENNA HD Radio ETHERNET WI AN qT rr Erba Wl 2 2 ait A d zum WW Bn ca QD 9 ID a zd E w ANT a EA DENON LINK 4th TAL ASSIGNABLE OPTIC m IDEN 9 o ot o Mo o J xi T OOJ AB x AF oos DEP Eu m Qr aes yY P WW x TI b EN s E TIS UIS AC OUTLETS l SS SSNS NE 1 KR z ee eS Dy SR d A N e S eS SER SON if VcR Pod DVR R mo a SR SBR SR SBR HR 5 1 ecarco S BACK FHEIGHT F WIDE A pie 120V 60H2 s RO A A A SWITCHED TOTAL 1208
254. ols amp lt gt Space strength Di iti isplay Condition Numbers 0123456789 Signal strength is excellent 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the display name Signal strength is good 8 Signalstrength is weak o e gt 7 Default Yes Reset to the defaults Reset all settings to factory No Do not reset to the defaults No signal default 64 Setting SIRIUS Radio Reception Restrictions gui Parental Lock Default settings are underlined e his can be set when the input source is SIRIUS e For any channel set the radio reception limits Setting items Setting contents Lock Setting 1 Press AV to select Lock Setting and then press gt or ENTER set the channel radio 2 Pressing D input the password 4 digits number and press g reception limits ENTER 3 Select channel by pressing AV and set the lock by pressing lt P Unlock Do not lock selected channel s Lock Lock selected channel s When a Parental Locked channel is tuned Enter Lock Code is displayed then input the password e The default password is 0000 e f the password is wrong Lock Code is incorrect is displayed Input the correct password e While listening to the channel being played you can also set parental lock I page 74 Press AV to select Edit Lock Code and then press gt or ENTER Input current loc
255. olume level See overleaf Return to previous menu Setting items Audyssey Settings Continued Setting contents Reference Level Offset Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard film mix level It makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB However film reference level is not always used in music or other non film content The Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level reference 5 dB 10 dB and 15 dB that can be selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard e OdB Film Ref This is the default setting and should be used when listening to movies e 5dB Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range such as classical music e 10dB Select this setting for Jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film reference e 15dB Select this setting for pop rock music or other program material that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range Setting is enabled when Dynamic is ON I 92 Setting items Audyssey Settings Continued Adjusting the Sound and Picture Quality Audio Video Adjust Setting contents About Dynamic Volume Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations
256. om the speakers or the PRE OUT terminals when headphones are connected e Select an input source for which the digital input setting has been made e Match the terminal to which the digital input terminal is assigned with the input mode e Set Dimmer to a setting other than OFF e Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode The display turns off when in the Pure Direct mode Display is off DOLBY DIGITAL indicator does not appear on display e Check the Blu ray Disc player DVD player s audio output setting For details read the Blu ray Disc player DVD player s operating Instructions 130 Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Power switches off e The protection circuit will be activated depending upon the suddenly while you temperature rise in the internal parts of the unit Please switch off are using the AVR power at once and re apply the power after the body temperature 4810CI the power has fallen sufficiently indicator will flash e Please re install AVR 4810CI in a place having good ventilation in red at intervals of approximately 2 seconds e Please use speakers which have the specified impedance e The protection circuit has been activated because the core wires of different speaker cables have touched each other or a core wire has slipped out of the terminal and is touching the AVR 4810CI s rear panel Unplug the power cord then after twisting the core wires together tightly again or effecting terminat
257. ompatible with stereo With superior spectral resolution and channel separation Neural Surround draws the brain s attention to sonic details in musical instruments vocals and ambience that are typically masked by other playback systems This allows the listener to fully experience the richness and subtleties in recorded performance as never before As the chosen format for XM Satellite Radio s new XM HD surround programming Neural Surround will help deliver more surround music to more listeners than any other broadcast format XM Satellite Radio will be the first radio company to broadcast surround sound on the radio 24 hours a day and will offer three channels fully dedicated to Neural Surround music This alone will amount to more than 25 000 hours of Neural Surround M music each year neural SURROUND This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio Corporation D amp M Holdings Inc hereby grants the user a non exclusive nontransferable limited license right exercisable to use the NA SURROUND Technology and other US and World Wide Patents Pending technology Neural and Neural Audio and Neural Surround are trademarks of Neural Audio Corporation All Rights Reserved Audyssey Audyssey MultEQ XT Audyssey MultEQ XT is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in a large listening area Based on several room
258. on 10625 Proscan 00392 Fisher 10000 10054 10154 10217 ae S Samsung 01442 20739 _ Capehart 10217 10683 10809 10853 280 Son 00639 E Carnivale 10030 oe 12008 D 21972 223 Acoustic Research 11269 Funai 10000 10171 11271 11904 DirecTV 20739 star Choice 00869 mm 10030 Carver 10054 10170 G G Gateway 21972 T Tivo Acura 10009 es pu FODDE 0588 10035 10047 Go Video 20614 d Admiral TOOT OU 1114711347 11447 11917 H Hewlett Packard m 10163 10264 10418 Celera 10765 EE E SEN E Advent 10761 11933 Centrex 10780 umm 10047 HD vu Digital Personal Video Adventuri 10000 Changhong 10156 10765 10820 10821 ETE ee Recorder Cable Combination Adyson 10217 Cineral 10092 Hughes Network 20739 Gibralter 10000 10017 10030 Systems C Cisco 01877 Agna 10150 Citek 10047 Go Video 10886 Humax 20739 D Di mms Aiko 10092 Citizen 10000 10001 10030 10035 x e TET Igeo S 10054 10060 10092 10171 Go Vision 11937 La M Motorola 01187 01376 Wwa qmm 10030 10092 10001 10009 10030 10036 iBUYPOWER 21972 10009 10030 10060 10145 GoldStar 10037 10047 10054 10073 3 P Pace 00237 01877 10208 10672 10702 10812 vm 10017 10030 10047 10054 TER L Linksys Pioneer 01877 mal 11207 11537 11675 11676 10060 10178 cx TET M NEE Center PC 21972 Scientific Atlanta 01877 R 190 12078 Solutions 10047 11447 aE TESNE Microsoft 21972 Supercable 00276
259. on contents of the display DOLBY DIGITAL other than 2ch DOLBY DIGITAL EX DTS HD PLIIx MUSIC MULTI IN Dolby EX 1 This is displayed when the input signal is DTS ES Matrix 6 1 and the AVR 4810Cl s AFDM L page 91 setting is set to ON I x2 This is displayed when the input signal is DTS ES Discrete BT 3 This is displayed when the input signal is DTS 96 24 DOLBY DIGITAL Plus DOLBY TrueHD DTS b Tch DTS ES Discrete 6 1 DTS ES Matrix 6 1 DIS 96 24 PCM multi ch DSD multi ch For details see page 126 87 yoeqheld Selecting the Surround Surround Mode Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit _ gt BUTTON Button only on the main unit BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit BUTTON 2 Playing in a DENON Original 3 Direct Playback Surround Mode In this mode the signals bypass the tone control circuitry for high quality sound The sound is output to the same channels as the input signal The desired mode according to the program source and viewing situation can be selected from among 10 DENON original surround modes 1 Playing the source 1257 page 66 1 Playing the source 1287 page 66 DSP SIMULATION PURE DIRECT Select the surround mode by pressing DSP 2 P
260. ond start over from step 1 Z 7 2 5 134 1 Audio section Power amplifier Rated output Dynamic power Output connectors e Analog Input sensitivity Input impedance Frequency response S N Distortion Rated output Digital D A output Digital input Front 140 W 140W 8 O ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D 180 W 180W 6 O ohms 1 kHz with 0 7 96 T H D Center 140W 8 O ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D 180W 6 O ohms 1 kHz with 0 7 T H D Surround 140 W 140W 8 O ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D 180 W 180W 6 O ohms 1 kHz with 0 7 96 T H D Surround back Front height Front wide 140 W 140W 8 O ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 96 T H D 180 W 180W 6 O ohms 1 kHz with 0 7 96 T H D 150 W x 2ch 8 O ohms 220 W x 2ch 4 O ohms 6 16 O ohms 200 mV 12 kO kohms except for EXT IN SW S SB CD PHONO V AUX 200 mV 47 kO kohms EXT IN SW S SB CD PHONO V AUX 10 Hz 100 kHz 1 3 dB DIRECT mode 102 dB IHF A weighted DIRECT mode 0 005 20 Hz 20 kHz DIRECT mode 1 2 V Rated output 2 V at O dB playback Total harmonic distortion 0 008 96 1 kHz at O dB S N ratio 102 dB Dynamic range 100 dB Format Digital audio interface Phono equalizer PHONO input REC OUT Input sensitivity RIAA deviation S N Rated output Distortion fa
261. onfig Check To proceed press Next Config Check Distance Check Ch Level Check Crossover Check Next Store Distance Check Channel Level Check Crossover Freq Check X Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the actual distance due to added electrical delay common in subwoofers 6 Press A V to select the channel you want to check The measurement result of each speaker is displayed X If you want to check another item press RETURN X Select Next Store and press ENTER to proceed to STEP6 Return to previous menu 35 operation buttons Up Down Left Right o e gt 7 Make the Optimal Speaker Settings and Correct the Room Acoustics Audyssey Auto Setup STEP6 Store Select Store and B Bosse AUTOSETUP DYSSEY DENON then press ENTER ci Sh ase save the measuring results X The save operation takes about 30 seconds to complete During saving of measuring results be sure not to turn off the power IS aupyssey auto setup YPYSS5 DENON When the screen shown on the right gem 1234566 appears unplug the setup microphone from the AVR 4810CI SETUP MIC jack Auto Setup 15 now finished Please unplug microphone 9 Select Exit and then press ENTER L Exiting the GUI Menu Press MENU while the GUI menu is displayed The GUI menu display disappears After performing Audyssey Auto Set
262. ons repeat steps 1 to 4 e Multicasts can also be preset e Stations can be preset automatically at Auto Preset 187 63 Preset stations are erased by overwriting them Listening to Preset Stations 1 Press A G to select the memory block A to G 2 Press CHANNEL or 1 8 to select the desired preset station You can also operate via the main unit In this case perform the following operations Press TUNING PRESET gt then turn SOURCE SELECT gt to select the preset radio station e f an audio program from HD2 to HD8 has been interrupted or if a program is called out using the preset buttons after it has been interrupted HD1 is automatically selected after about 20 seconds L Default settings A8 87 5 87 97 89 1 99 9 97 97 98 1 98 9 100 1 Mrz B1 101 9 102 7 7 107 97 90 1 90 1 90 1 90 1 7 90 1 Mz Direct Frequency Tuning You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in 1 Press SEARCH 2 Input frequencies by means of 0 9 X If lt is pressed the immediately preceding input is cancelled 3 When setting is completed press ENTER The preset frequency is tuned in 19 yoeqheld Tuning in Radio Stations HD Radio Technology 76 Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit _ gt BUTTO
263. or the different input sources Setting contents Auto Automatically detect input signal and perform playback HDMI Play only signals from HDMI input Digital Play only signals from digital input Analog Play only signals from analog input EXT IN Play only signals from EXT IN input e HDMI can be set for input sources for which HDMI is assigned at Input Assign 187 page 59 e Digital can be set for input sources for which Digital is assigned at Input Assign IG page 59 e When digital signals are properly input the DIG indicator lights on the display If the DIG indicator does not light check the digital input connector assignment and the connections e he surround mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to EXT IN Progressive Mode Select optimum progressive mode for video material This can be set when the input source is VAUX Auto he video material is automatically detected and the appropriate mode is set Video 1 Select mode suitable for video playback Video 2 Select mode suitable for video and 30 frame film material playback This can be set when i o Scaler is set to anything other than OFF Decode Mode Set the decode mode for input source This can be set when the input source is 1 ver pve vAux Auto Detect type of digital input signal and decode and play automatically PCM Decode and play only P
264. or iPod cannot be assigned is displayed as e f control dock for iPod is not connected to the AVR 4810CI assignment of the iPod dock is disabled and you can use it as a standard input source Default Reset all settings to factory default Yes Reset to the defaults No Do not reset to the defaults If you select Default and press ENTER the message Return all settings to the default is displayed Select Yes or No and then press ENTER 60 Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu res T Setting items Video Select Change video input to your preferred input source Making the Video Settings Video Default settings are underlined Setting contents SOURCE Play the picture and sound of the input source DVD TV SAT CBL VCR DVR V AUX Select video input source to view This can be set for individual input sources Set by either pressing VIDEO SELECT on the main unit VIDEO SELECT on the main remote control unit e When operating from the main remote control unit Press VIDEO SELECT on the main remote control unit repeatedly until the picture you want to see is displayed To cancel press VIDEO SELECT on the main remote control unit and select SOURCE e When operating from the main unit After pressing VIDEO SELECT on the main unit turn the SOURCE SELECT on the main unit until the pictu
265. orites so as not to accidentally perform menu operations for zones you do not intend to operate 103 u t lt o T v 9 lt T Convenient Functions Example 2 Setup menu screen SOURCE ReLoad Source SAT CBL Lost Input Assign DENON SETUP MENU SOURCE SELECT MODE I IAUDIO VIDEO ADJUST mm EuL 1 Video Convert ON OFF 1 Scaler Analog Analog amp HDMI OFF INFORMATION 1 Resolution analog Auto 480 576 1080i 720p 1080p 1080p 24Hz Resolution HDMI 1 Progressive Mode AUTO VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 lenem Full Normal Input Mode Input Mode Decode Mode Source Level roo MMT m 7 15 n 10 Click the menu from which you want to T settings The display on the right becomes each setting screen 11 Click SAVE when you want to save settings and click LOAD when you want to call settings Becomes each operation screen 12 Click v and select from the displayed items 13 Click determine a setting 14 After entering characters click Set to set or click Def to return to initial setting 15 Enter figures or click lt or gt to make the setting and then click Set Example 3 Web configuration screen Web Controller Config Top Menu Link Setup 1 16 OFF 17 Back 16 Click ON when perfo
266. other than the amplifier In ZONE4 mode only the ZONE OFF ZONE ON and SOURCE SELECT buttons can be operated ADVANCED SETUP ZONE OFF QUICK SELECT Ca C2 Ca SSS meme Pay CHANNEL MUTE MENU SEARCH a gt PI B 5 11 TUNINGA V REPEAT RANDOM 0000 ZONE OFF QUICK SELECT cH MUTE 150 194i E QD IEE 22100739974 KA J pm ie ZONE ON MEMORY INPUT ZONE SELECT ZONE ON INPUT SOURCE SELECT M ZONE CALL r VOLUME MEMORY x7 ENTER iu meron ALL MUSIC FAVORITES USB Functions of Buttons by Component Zowseection M 2 M z B 2 Zone operation mode ed ZONEOF 1 Powerturned of D o _ o Preset channel Preset channel seleation _ O aia lt Went ae Rd VOLUME Adjustmentof volume 1 _ Adjustment of volume 1 MUE ting et menu __ _ _ Selected Presetmemoryregistraion Multicast switching A V 3 m Category search Cursor Parental Lock password check screen D ENTER RETURN zm ___ ALL Music server only FAVORITES
267. ound back speaker About the main listening position M 5 The main listening position refers to the position where listeners would normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening environment Audyssey MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance level polarity and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer 32 e oud test sounds may be played during Audyssey Auto setup This is part of normal operation If there is background noise in room these test signals will increase in volume e Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made This will cause inaccurate readings e Make the room as quiet as possible Background noise can disrupt the room measurements Close windows silence cell phones televisions radios air conditioners fluorescent lights home appliances light dimmers or other devices as measurements may be affected by these sounds Cell phones should be placed away from all audio electronics during the measurement process as Radio Frequency Interference RFI may cause measurement disruptions even if the cell phone is not in use Operating MASTER VOLUME during the measurements will cancel the measurements Make the Optimal Speaker Settings and Correct the Room Acoustics Audyssey Auto Setup Connect the Included Setup Microphone
268. ound expansion system that adds new channels to improve the surround impression Based on research in human hearing DSX adds a pair of Wide channels in the front because that information is critical in the rendering of a realistic soundstage DSX then adds a pair of Height channels above the main front channels to reproduce the next most important acoustical and perceptual cues related to soundstage depth In addition to creating these new channels DSX applies Surround Envelopment Processing to enhance the blend between the front and side back surround channels The result is a much more seamless and enveloping home theater experience Manual EQ Use the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker Adjust CH Correct the tone of each speaker D Select the speaker tone adjustment method All Adjust the tone of all speakers together L R Adjust the tone of left and right speakers together Each Adjust the tone of each speaker 2 Select the speaker 3 Select the adjustment frequency band 63Hz 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 16kHz X Select the speakers you want to adjust when L R or Each is selected 4 Adjust the level 20 0dB 6 0dB 0 0dB 2 Can be set when MultEO XT setting IS page 92 is Manual Curve Copy Copy Audyssey Flat curve from MultEQO XT Yes Copy No Do not copy Curve Copy is displayed after Audyssey Auto Setup has been performed
269. oup certifying interoperability X For purposes of improvement specifications and design are subject to change without notice 135 o o o D 5 List of preset codes Liste de codes preregles Blu ray Disc Player D L M 0 P HD DVD Player gt lt r Denon Insignia Integra LG Magnavox Marantz Olevia Onkyo Panasonic Philips Pioneer Samsung Sharp Sony Sylvania Integra LG Microsoft Onkyo RCA Toshiba Xbox DVD Player 1 A 3D LAB A Trend Accurian AEG Aiwa Akai Alba Allegro Amstrad Apex Digital Arrgo BBK Bel Canto Design Black Diamond Blue Parade Blue Sky Bose Brandt Broksonic Bush 32258 30675 32147 30741 30675 32414 32331 32147 31641 32084 32434 30142 32442 30199 32250 31516 30675 31769 30741 32083 31769 31769 31769 32083 30503 30539 30714 30675 30788 30533 30641 30695 30705 30770 30899 30672 30869 30713 30533 30672 31056 31061 31023 31224 31571 30 13 30571 30685 30713 32023 30651 30685 31418 30690 C California Audio Labs 30490 1 PRESET CODE Cambridge Soundworks Cat Centrex Cinea CineVision Citizen Clairtone Clatronic Coby Craig Creative CyberHome Cytron Daewoo Dansai Decca Denon Digitor Digitrex Disney DiViDo Dual Durabrand DVD2000 Elta Emerson Enterprise Entivo Enzer ESA Firstline Fisher Funai Gateway GE GFM Go Video
270. ower Power continues to be supplied to some of the circuitry even when the power is in the standby mode When leaving home for long periods of time or when traveling either press POWER to turn off the power or unplug the power cord from the power outlet GUI Menu Map Gul Pressing MENU displays the GUI menu From this menu you can move to various setting screens 1 STEREO 1 WIDE SCREEN 1 DIRECT 1 SUPER STADIUM 1 STANDARD _I ROCK ARENA DOLBY PLIIz JAZZ CLUB 1 DOLBY 1 CLASSIC DOLBY PLII or CONCERT DOLBY PL _I MONO MOVIE 1 DTS NEO 6 1 VIDEO GAME _J neural 1 MATRIX 2 MULTI CH STEREO VIRTUAL acoustics problem JJ Parameter Check signals etc Jj Status 2 Audio Input Signal Surround Mode I amp page 87 Select the surround mode Auto Setup IG page 32 Optimize speaker settings and correct room 1 Audyssey Auto Setup Information I amp page 96 Show information about receiver settings input _1 Auto Surround 3 HDMI Information H Quick Select JJ Preset Channel Mode Source Select 1257 57 SAT CBL VCR DVR V AUX NET USB Favorites Internet Radio Media Server USB iPod Napster Rhapsody XM SIRIUS HD Radio TUNER PHONO CD DVD HDP TV Select input source and make playback settings X The displayed menu differs according to the selected input source 2 Play P
271. p menu is displayed click on the menu you want to operate ETI EZI Web Controller Config 2 Click when you operate each zone iz amp Example 1 3 Click when you operate the setup menu iz Example 2 4 Click to change the Web control screen setting Iz amp Example 3 5 Click when you operate a small screen such as a PDA screen etc iz amp Example 4 5 Operate Example 1 Main zone control screen MAIN ZONE POWER Zone contRoL gt gt CHANNEL LEVEL gt NETAUDO USB 7 Network Tuner HK Ti 40 30 20 10 0 lote To use the web control function set the GUI menu Manual Setup Network Setup Other Network Standby setting to ON MAIN ZONE o gt O w SOURCE Video i Player S B gn a 9 Internet 6 Click to perform each operation Changes to each operation screen I Example 5 7 Click when you update to the latest information Normally there is a change to the latest information each time you operate When operated from the main unit click because the screen is not updated 8 Click to return to the top menu Displayed when setting Top Menu Link Setup to ON in Example 3 9 Click to add a setting to the Favorites in your browser We recommend registering the setting screens for the different zones in the browser s fav
272. perates when the system is 7 1 channel or below AL24 Processing Plus AL24 Processing for All Channels DENON has further developed its proprietary AL24 Processing an analog waveform reproduction technology to support the 192 kHz sampling frequency AL24 Processing Plus thoroughly suppresses quantization noise associated with D A conversion of LPCM signals to reproduce the low level signals with optimum clarity that will bring out all the delicate nuances of the music Equipped foe not only front left and right channels but also for the surround left and right center and subwoofer channels AL24 Processing Plus operates in a system with 8 1 channels or less when digital PCM signals are input and the surround mode is as follows e PURE DIRECT e DIRECT e STEREO MULTI CH PURE DIRECT MULTI CH DIRECT MULTI CH IN Explanation of Terms About Networks Windows Media Player Ver 11 This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft Corporation It can be used to play playlists created with Windows Media Player Ver 11 as well as files in such formats as WMA DRM WMA and WAV vTuner This is a free online contents server for Internet radio Note that usage fees are included in upgrade costs For inquiries about this service visit the vIuner site below vluner website http Awww radiodenon com This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and Brid
273. play new features that can be downloaded to the AVR 4810Cl and perform an update Upgrade Execute the upgrade process When updating starts the power indicator becomes red and the GUI screen is shut down The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed When upgrading is complete the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed X If the upgrade is not successful an error message identical to those in Firmware Update will appear on the display check the settings and network environment then update again Upgrade Status A list of the additional functions provided by the Upgrade will be displayed See the DENON website for details about updates When the procedure is complete Registered is displayed in this menu and updates can be carried out If the procedure has not been carried out Not Registered is displayed The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the procedure The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding gt and STATUS on the main unit for at least 3 seconds Moves the cursor Confirm the setting Return to previous menu operation buttons Cancel the menu Up Down Left Right Notes concerning use of Firmware Update Add New Feature e n order to use these functions you must have the correct system requirements and settings for a broadb
274. put by each speaker terminal Amp Assign setting 1257 page 39 41 Channels output by each speaker terminal FRONT Bi Wir or Bi Amp Bi Wiring x1 FRONT BW FRONT BW Bi Amp X2 FRONT BA FRONT BA X1 Can be selected when Assign Mode is NORMAL Z2 or 2 3 X2 Can be selected when Assign Mode is NORMAL About Bi amp Connections These connections make for higher quality playback sound with no interference between the signals of the bass and treble units When making bi amp connection the same signal is output from the front speaker terminal and the Bi Wir or Bi Amp terminal e Use speakers compatible with bi amp connections e When making bi amp connections be sure to remove the short circuiting plate or wire between the speaker s woofer and tweeter terminals 15 gt D T Speaker Connections F When using a banana plug Tighten the speaker terminal firmly before inserting the banana plug V 2 Ww When the Assign Mode is set to ALL Z2 or ALL Z3 only multi zone audio is output from the AVR 4810CI speaker terminals For output in the MAIN ZONE connect the output from the AVR 4810CI pre out terminal to the power amp in the other room MAIN ZONE Use speakers where one speaker has an impedance of 6 16 O ohms When using a speaker with impedance of 6 O ohms to 8 O ohms make sure to set the Speak
275. pyright protection system called HDCP High bandwidth Digital Content Protection HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of the connected AV device The AVR 4810Cl supports HDCP Please consult the operating instructions of your Blu ray disc player DVD player or monitor When a device that does not support HDCP is connected video signals are not properly output 17 JNetwork AV SURROUND RECEIVER AVR 4810CI Connecting Devices HDMI Setup iz page 43 EM Make settings for HDMI video audio output Connecting the Playback Components e Use cable on which the HDMI logo is indicated a certified HDMI RGB Range e HDMI Audio Out product for connection to the HDMI connector Normal playback e Vertical Stretch e Monitor Out may not possible when using cable other than one on which the Auto Lip Sync e HDMI Control Blu ray Disc Player DVD Player HDMI logo is indicated a non HDMI certified product Select the terminal to use and connect the device e When the AVR 4810CI is connected to other devices with HDMI NOTE cables also connect the AVR 4810CI and TV using an HDMI cable audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the For instructions on HDMI connections see Connecting Devices e When connecting a device that supports Deep Color transmission HDMI input signals Equipped with HDMI Terminals on page 17 please
276. r multi channel sources Set the decoding method for the surround back channel DSCRT Play the surround back signals included in the 7 1 channel source MTRX ON Generate and play the surround back signals from the surround channel signals ES MTRX 1 Generate and play the surround back signals from the surround channel signals of the DTS source ES DSCRT 2 Play the surround back signals included in the 6 1 channel DTS source PLIIx CINEMA 3 Generate and play the surround back signals by decoding the signals in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Cinema mode PLIIx MUSIC Generate and play the surround back signals by decoding the signals in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode OFF The surround back channel is not played 1 This can be selected when playing DTS sources 2 This can be selected when playing DTS sources including a signal to identify discrete 6 1 channel signals 3 This can be selected when Speaker Configuration Surround Back I page 41 is set to 2spkrs e This can also be set by pressing STANDARD on the main remote control unit e f the source being played contains a surround back signal the decoder type is automatically selected by the AFDM function Set AFDM to OFF to switch to your preferred decoder e f the setting in Speaker Configuration Surround Back 8 page 41 is None Surround Back is not displayed Subwoofer Att Attenuate subwoofer level w
277. r provider Normally Input 255 255 2550 Default Gateway When connected to a gateway router input its IP address e Primary DNS Secondary DNS If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider input it at Primary DNS If there are two or more DNS addresses input the first one at Secondary DNS 4 Use V to select Exit and press ENTER Setup is complete X When connecting to the network via a Proxy server select Proxy and press ENTER t amp page 50 Proxy settings e f you are using a broadband router DHCP function there is no need to make the settings at IP Address and Proxy since the DHCP function is set to ON in the AVR 4810CI s default settings e f the AVR 4810CIl is being used connected to a network without the DHCP function the network settings must be made In this case some knowledge of networks is required For details consult a network administrator e f you cannot connect to the Internet recheck the connections and settings IE page 26 e f you do not understand about Internet connection contact your ISP Internet Service Provider or the store from which you purchased your computer e When you want to cancel the setting during IP address input press RETURN Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu 49 BST Te EST alae fom ETELE Setting items Setting
278. re you want to see is displayed To cancel press VIDEO SELECT on the main unit then turn SOURCE SELECT on the main unit and select SOURCE e t is not possible to select HDMI input signals e he video select function does not work with HDMI signals e nput sources for which Delete is selected at Source Delete I page 53 cannot be selected Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Video Convert The input video signal is converted automatically in function of the connected TV 57 page 10 Converting Input Video Signals for Output Video Conversion Function Confirm the setting This can be set when the input source is ove v aux The input video signal is converted OFF The input video signal is not converted e When non standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input the video conversion function might not operate In this case set Video Convert to OFF e When Video Convert is set to OFF the video conversion function does not work In this case connect the AVR 4810CI TV with the same type of cable Return to previous menu Making the Input Settings Source Select Setting items i p Scaler The input source s resolution is converted to the resolution set at Resolution Setting contents Analog Use i p scaler function for analog video signal Analog amp HDMI Use i p scaler function for analog and HDMI video signal
279. ress DIRECT STEREO to select the DIRECT SIMULATION This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers Qus Displaying the Currently Playing Surround Mode v lt T WIDE SCREEN his mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of The indication contents of viewing a movie on a large screen the display SUPER STADIUM lt This mode is suited for viewing sports programs Analog signal PCM 2ch de is f the at h fal ROCKARENA mode is for enjoying the atmosphere ofalive pon Digital source DIRECT DIRECT STEREO MJ DTS source JAZZ CLUB pins mode IS for enjoying the atmosphere of a live Other 2 channel digital signals concert ina jazz Eluloo DSD 2ch DSD DIRECT CLASSIC CONCERT his mode is for appreciating classical concert MULTI CH DIRECT programs MULTI CH DIRECT Dolby EX This mode is for playing monaural movie sources PCM multi ch MULTI CH DIRECT CINEMA ith surround sound MULTI CH DIRECT PLIIx MUSIC PURE DIRECT me MULTI CH DIRECT 71 VIDEO GAME This mode is suited for achieving surround sound DSD multi ch DSD MULT DIRECT DIRECT STEREO with video games DSP SIMULATION MATRIX his mode lets you add a sense of expansion to stereo music sources When DSD signals are converted to PCM signals as set by the audio parameters and speaker settings DIRECT or MULTI CH DIRECT is displayed VIRTUAL Th
280. rming Top Menu Link Setup When set up return to the top menu from each operation screen Default setting OFF 17 Click to return to the top menu 104 Example 4 PDA menu screen DENON Web Controller Multi Zone2 Control Multi Zone3 Control Multi Zone4 Control t em 18 Select to operate each zone You cannot change setup menu operations and zone name on the PDA menu screen Example 5 Net Audio operating screen DENON AVR 4810Cl 1 l gt Favorites iPod Dock gt Dock gt NET AUDIO USB MAIN ZONE Internet Radio Media Server 24 19 Click the menu from which you want to make settings 20 Click v to select the preset channel you want to play x 21 Click to stop play 22 When registering presets click v to select the channel you want to register and then click MEMORY 23 When searching using an acronym click v the displayed characters 24 Click when selecting menu x 25 Click to repeat play 26 Click to random play and select from Example 6 Dedicated iPod Touch screen X When accessed from the iPod Touch browser an optimized operation screen is displayed oi iPod Dock iPod Direct NetAudio USB Volume 60 50 40 30 20 0 Various Memory Functions Personal Memory Plus Function This function sets the settings input mode surround mode H
281. rs ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Symbols amp 4 Numbers 0123456789 Space gt 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the display name Default Yes Reset to the defaults Reset all settings to factory No Do not reset to the defaults default Correcting the Input Source s Playback Level Gull Default settings are underlined Source Level e Corrects the playback level of the selected input source s audio input e Set this if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources Setting contents 12dB 12dB OdB e The dese input level and digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which HDMI or Digital is assigned at Input Assign 187 page 59 e When e source is Internet Radio Media Server Napster Rhapsody Napster Rhapsody USB iPod USB iPod Favorites the setting is NET USB 62 Main remote control unit ROH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu awk h operation buttons Displaying the Playback Screen for the Different Input Sources Play When the input source is NET USB Favorites iPod the corresponding screen can be displayed Setting the iPod with iPod Dock Playback Mode Playback Mode This can be set for the input source for which iPod dock is assigned at Input
282. rt menus under Music are displayed X If the screens above are not displayed the iPod may not be properly connected Try connecting again X When no control dock for iPod is connected this can also be selected by pressing iPod X When no control dock for iPod is connected this operation is also possible in the iPod mode 68 Set the main remote control unit to the NET USB mode 257 page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit X When no control dock for iPod is connected this operation is also possible in the iPod mode Press SEARCH and hold it down for a 2 seconds or more to select the display mode X There are two modes for display the contents recorded on the ROO Browse mode This is the mode for displaying the iPod information on the GUI screen to operate the iPod In this mode you cannot perform operations directly on the iPod itself With the AVR 4810Cl s display only English letters and numbers and certain symbols can be displayed Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with period Remote mode This is the mode for performing operations directly on the iPod itself while watching the screen displayed on the iPod In this mode the GUI screen is not displayed Remote iPod is displayed on the AVR 4810CI s display X The Remote mode is not supported on 5th generation iPods or iPod nanos
283. s etc at Network Connecting I page 46 e he AVR 4810Cl is not compatible with PPPoE A PPPoE compatible router is required if you have a contract for a line of the type with which the PPPoE is set e Depending on the ISP with which you have your contract it may be necessary to make proxy server settings to use the Internet radio function If you made proxy server settings on the computer to connect to the Internet make the proxy server settings on the AVR 4810Cl in the same way 27 gt T Connecting the Power Wait until all connections have been completed before connecting the power cord Connection to the AC outlet e These outlets supply power to external audio equipment eAudio equipment with a total power consumption of 120 W 1 A can be connected e The power supply turns on and off together with lt ON STANDBY gt When set to ON power is supplied from the outlet When set to STANDBY no power is supplied Power cord included To household power outlet AC 120 V 60 Hz e Insert the AC plugs securely Incomplete connections could cause noise e Only use the AC outlets to plug in audio equipment Do not use them as power supplies for hairdryers or anything other than audio equipment ON STANDBY POWER ES MAIN m s QUICK SELECT 4 POWER ON POWER OFF ELEM
284. s displayed on the 2 Volume Level 1 page 106 except for ZONE4 1 Press MAIN to display the mode for the zone to be In the zone mode for which you want to operate operated INPUT SAT CBL the desired QUICK SELECT Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set S IGNAL ANALOG Memory appears on the on screen display or The time switches as shown below each time SLEEP is VOL C40dB 2Channel STEREO Vol Disp Relative display pressed B Lev Zz deba m NOUS The current settings will be memorized OFF UT P On Lev LAST gt 30 min 60 min Lch Lev Mute Lev 4 FULL Rch Lev Quick Select Defaults a ee 22 23 24 Quick Select 1 DVD 40dB To cancel the sleep timer 22 23 24 Quick Select 2 SAT CBE Press SLEEP to set OFF Press AV lt gt to select the menu to be set or 22 23 Quick Select 3 74 Quick Select 3 40dB P 3 Press MENU to enter the setting The sleep timer is also canceled when the AVR 4810CI is set to the The on screen display disappears Calling the Settings Out standby mode or the ZONE2 or ZONES power is turned off Press QUICK SELECT at which the settings you want to lt N P call out are saved For ZONE2 the Zone Setup can be made while watching the on screen display i 2 Naming Quick Select settings h Also when ZONES is operated the on screen display appears on the See Qui
285. s of DVD Audio discs PCM multi channel signals etc Full spec digital transfer of the audio contents of Super Audio CD is possible by connecting a player equipped for DENON LINK 3rd Edition During processing of DENON LINK the indicator of the display lights DENON LINK 4th uses the clock of the AV amplifier connected by DENON LINK to achieve HDMI signal transfer with little jitter when playing BD channel Equipped with Advanced AL24 Processing time axis region information volume expansion In addition to the existing AL24 Processing Plus bit expansion technology DENON has also developed Advanced AL24 Processing that dramatically improves information volume in the time axis region using high speed signal detection and processing technology In addition to expanding original 16 bit digital data to 24 bits Advanced AL24 Processing uses data interpolation along the time axis or upconverted sampling to achieve natural interpolation without losing the original data A digital filter is used to further expand adaptability and perform optimum filtering calculations for ringing free pulse response pulsive music data and attack sounds his results in the reproduction of such spatial information as the delicate nuances in the music the positions of the performers and the breadth height and depth of the concert hall Advanced AL24 Processing is conducted for all channels and modes other than DSD DIRECT It also o
286. s point Connection completed is displayed 1 Manual settings gt NETWORK CONNECTING DENON Select a connection method appropriate for your wireless LAN host gt NETWORK CONNECTING 1 2 DJJN 0 Setting contents D On the GUI menu select Network Connecting Manual and press ENTER 2 Use AV 1l D to input the name of the wireless network SSID and press ENTER The types of characters that can be input are as shown below Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Symbols 4 96 amp lt gt Q M 4 Y Numbers 0123456789 Space You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input 3 Use AV to select the Security and press None Select if not encrypted Can also be used even without encryption through we recommend encryption for improved security WEP WPA PSK TKIP WPA PSK AES WPA2 PSK TKIP WPA2 PSK AES Select the encryption method according to the encryption setting of the access point you are using 4 Use AV 1 D to input the Key encryption key and press ENTER Enter the same encryption key as used for the access point The types of characters that can be input are as shown below Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Symbols a
287. s shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine fire or the like CAUTION e he ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items such as newspapers tablecloths curtains etc e No naked flame sources such as lighted candles should be placed on the unit e Observe and follow local regulations regarding battery disposal e Do not expose the unit to dripping or splashing fluids e Do not place objects filled with liquids such as vases on the unit ATTENTION e a ventilation ne doit pas tre g n e en recouvrant les ouvertures de la ventilation avec des objets tels que journaux rideaux tissus etc e Aucune flamme nue par exemple une bougie ne doit tre plac e sur l appareil e Veillez respecter les lois en vigueur lorsque vous jetez les piles usag es appareil doit pas tre expos l eau ou l humidit e Ne pas poser d objet contenant du liquide par exemple un vase sur l appareil CAUTION To completely disconnect this product from the mains disconnect the plug from the wall socket outlet The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply to the unit and must be within easy access by the user PRECAUTION Pour d connecter compl tement ce produit du courant secteur d branchez la prise de la prise murale la prise secteur est utilis e pour couper compl tement l alimentation de l appareil et l utilisateur doit pouv
288. settings GUI menu operations Dynamic Volume RESTORER Channel Level Audio Video Adjust Audio Delay MultEQ XT Input Mode Dynamic e When canceling the setting set Setup Lock to OFF Setting items Firmware Update Update the firmware of the receiver Setting contents Check for Update You can check for firmware updates You can also check approximately how long it will take to complete an update Start Execute the update process When updating starts the power indicator becomes red and the GUI screen is shut down The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed When updating is complete the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed X f updating fails the set automatically retries but if updating is still not possible one of the messages shown below is displayed If the display reads as shown below check the settings and network environment then update again Display Updating failed Updating failed Login failed Failure to log into server server is busy Wait a while then try again Connection fail Failure connecting to server Download fail Downloading of the firmware has failed Maintenance Mode Used when receiving maintenance from a DENON service engineer or custom installer Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or installer 56 Main remote control unit ROH Displaying the menu skh Add New Feature Dis
289. sic Cinema suited for playing movies and Game which is optimized for playing games Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX is a 6 1 channel surround format proposed by Dolby Laboratories that allows users to enjoy in their homes the DOLBY DIGITAL SURROUND EX audio format jointly developed by Dolby Laboratories and Lucas Films The 6 1 channels of sound including surround back channels provide improved sound positioning and expression of space Dolby Pro Logic Iiz Dolby Pro Logic IIz introduces a new dimension to Home Entertainment through the addition of a pair of front height channels Compatible with stereo 5 1 and 7 1 content Dolby Pro Logic gt provides enhanced spaciousness depth and dimension to movies concert video and video game playback while maintaining the full integrity of the source mix Dolby Pro Logic 2 identifies and decodes spatial cues that occur naturally in all content directing this information to the front height channels complementing the performance of left and right surround sound speakers Content that is encoded with Dolby Pro Logic 2 height channel information can be even more revealing with perceptually discrete height channel information bringing an exciting new dimension to home entertainment Dolby Pro Logic 2 with front height channels is also an ideal alternative for households that cannot support the placement of back surround speakers of a typical 7 1 channel system but may have books
290. sily Press MEMO while the Internet radio station you want to register is playing 2 Press A V to select Favorites then press ENTER Press 1 to select Add The Internet radio station is registered X If you do not want to register it press gt Listening to Internet Radio Stations Registered in Your Favorites 1 Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select I page 31 Press A V to select the Internet radio station then press ENTER or gt The AVR 4810Cl automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins Clearing Internet Radio Stations from Your Favorites 1 Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select I gt page 31 Press AV to select the Internet radio station you want to clear then press MEMO Press lt to select Remove The selected Internet radio station is cleared X To cancel the operation without clearing the station press D Playing Network Audio USB Memory Devices 79 yoeqheld Playing Network Audio USB Memory Devices v lt T 80 EX NET USB Symbols used to indicate buttons in this manual Button located on both the main unit and the remote control unit gt BUTTON Button only on the main unit BUTTON Button only on the remote control unit
291. small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies e When Subwoofer is set to No Front can automatically set to Large e When Front is set to Small Center Surround Surround Back Front Height and Front Wide can not be set to Large Center Set the presence and size of the center speaker e Large Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies e Small Use of a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for Setting items Speaker Configuration Setting contents Subwoofer Set the presence of a subwoofer e Yes Use a subwoofer e No Select when a subwoofer is not connected 2 When Front is set to Small Subwoofer can automatically set to Yes Surround Set the presence and size of the surround speakers e Large Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies e Small Use of a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies e None Select when the surround speakers are not connected e When Surround is set to Large Surround Back Front Height and Front Wide can be set to Large e When Surround is set to None Surround Back Front Height and Front Wide can automatically set to None Surround Back Set the presence size and number of surround back speakers eLarge Use of a large speaker that can adequately playback low frequencies e Small
292. speaker is being used Use the layout shown in the illustration below for the surround back speaker The AVR 4810CI supports up to 11 1 channel surround sound playback by adding front height and front wide channels to the 7 1 channel Front Center Surround Front height speakers Surround Back Subwoofer Front speakers Q Installing front height and front wide speakers offers Front ue cd x1 22 30 Center speaker 1 22 30 an even wider and deeper sensation compared with Front speakers x 2 22 45 zi traditional surround spacing thanks to the advanced Center speaker 3 55 60 E simulation surround technology Audyssey DSX and 34 90 110 Dolby Pro Logic IIz decoder X5 135 150 To use Audyssey DSX install front wide or front height 6 45 X2 Gack speakers Refer to page 121 for more information on Audyssey DSX To use Dolby Pro Logic 2 install front height speakers Refer to page 120 for more information on Dolby Pro Logic 2 Speaker Layout Below we introduce examples of speaker layouts Refer to these to arrange your speakers according to their type and how you want to use them Installing All the Speakers Front height speakers d Front speakers 4 Front wide speakers m E speakers 4 LPS Front wide Subwoofer Center speaker Surround speaker speaker 4 Surro
293. ss ENTER or gt measurement begins range press ENTER Speaker Config Check Distance Check Channel Level Check Durin measuring a E is Select Next and Crossover ireq Check Se A Fa aupyssey auto setrup 70285 DENON displayed 5 then press ENTER EL ae d to Elk Perform een coat POLIS E 3 Press A V to select the channel you want to check The measurement result of each speaker is displayed appears on the level indicator after about 3 5 seconds Red Fi AUbvssEY AUTO SETUP AUDYSSEY 456 Subwoofer Level Matching Please adjust the level of your active subwoofer unit that the level Indicates approx 75dB X If the measured level is outside the 72 78 dB range the level indicator 15 red Audyssey Auto Setup STEP2 Speaker Detection IS page 35 1 0 SW Test Start X When you selected Check in step 2 press A to select the Correction curve you want to check Audyssey or Audyssey Flat When you want to check another item press RETURN Pressing RETURN returns you to step 2 from there proceed to steps 2 and 3 If set Restore Yes you can return Audyssey Auto Setup measurement result value calculated at the start by MultEQ XT even when you have changed each setting manually X When measuring stops press ENTER RCH Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Displaying t
294. ssage e OFF Do not display update message e When you press ENTER during display of the notification message the Check for Update screen is displayed Refer to page 56 for more information on Firmware Update e Press RETURN to erase the notification message Napster Account Username Password Set or change Username types of characters that can be input are as shown below and Password I 82 Listening to Napster Lower case characters abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Upper case characters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ Symbols amp lt gt G NM Numbers 0123456789 Space e You can change the character type when you press SEARCH on the main remote control unit or MENU during character input e The password may not contain underscores _ Network Information Display network information Friendly Name Network Wired Wireless SSID DHCP ON OFF IP Address MAC Address Upgrade Notification Display a notification message on the AVR 4810Cl s GUI screen when downloadable firmware is released with Add New Feature The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the power is turned on Connect to broadband Internet 1287 page 26 when using this function e ON Display upgrade message e OFF Do not display upgrade message e When press ENTER during display of the notification message the Add
295. t the surround mode to a mode for surround playback eCheck that the surround back speakers power amplifier assignment is set to Normal eSet the surround back speakers to something other than None e Set Surround Parameter other than OFF e Set the surround mode to the surround playback mode Surround Back to something Ov gg 87 89 No sound is produced from subwoofer DTS sound is not output Dolby TrueHD DTS HD Dolby Digital Plus audio is not output Control dock for iPod Symptom Cause Countermeasure iPod played cannot be e Turn on the subwoofer s power e Set the subwoofer to Yes e Check the subwoofer connections e Increase the subwoofer s channel level e Set the Blu ray disc DVD player s audio output setting to Bit stream For details refer to the Blu ray disc DVD player s operating instructions e Use a DIS compatible Blu ray disc player DVD player e Set the decode mode to Auto or DTS e Make HDMI connections e Set the Blu ray disc DVD player s audio output setting to Bit stream For details refer to the Blu ray disc DVD player s operating instructions e Use a DIS compatible Blu ray disc player e Connect to the terminal to which switch the input source e Check the iPod connections e Plug the control dock for iPod s AC adapter into a power outlet Communications with the AVR 4810Cl are not possible unless the AC adapter is pl
296. the display 2 Naming Quick Select settings See Quick Select Name IG page 55 The Quick Select function be set separately for the different zones I page 101 Quick Select Function Input sources stored with the quick select function cannot be selected if they have been deleted at Source Delete I 53 In this case store them again Playing the Same Network Audio on Different Devices Connected in a Network Party Mode Function The same network audio Internet Radio Media Server or iPod DIRECT can be played on multiple DENON products equipped with the Party Mode function and connected in a network The party mode consists of one organizer and up to four attendees When one unit starts the party mode as the organizer up to four devices on which the party mode function Is activated automatically participate in the party as attendees Party Mode Function IG page 50 must be set to ON ahead of time in order to use the party mode function Starting the Party Mode as the Organizer 1 Press PARTY to become the organizer Enter Party Mode is displayed X An error message is displayed when you are not connected to a network Press lt gt to select Yes then press ENTER The indicator on the display lights The input source ORGANIZER automatically switches to NET USB and the attendees are automatically selected 3 Play the desired track L1 To Canc
297. the level of each channel Auto Surround Mode Make setting for memorizing surround mode setting for each input signal type ON Memorize settings Automatically play with the last used surround mode OFF Do not memorize settings Surround mode does not change according to input signal e The auto surround mode function lets you store in the memory the surround mode last used for playing the four types of input signals listed below D Analog and PCM 2 channel signals 2 Dolby Digital and DTS 2 channel signals 3 Dolby Digital and DTS multi channel signals 4 Multi channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS PCM DSD etc e When playing in the PURE DIRECT the surround mode does not change even if the input signal is changed Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu res T Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu 45 o o e gt Making the Network Settings Network Setup Make network settings Setting items Network Connecting Make settings for wired or wireless LAN Gull Default settings are underlined Setting contents Wireless LAN settings Use this procedure to configure the Wireless LAN settings 1 Fitting a rod antenna I 26 Connecting to a Home Network LAN
298. tion 1 8 1 8 hor d Lf MS vom sac TUNER TVINPUT gpwicoNTROL SETUP S UD dar JJ e gt e e When changing a setting be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVR 4810CI s 857 page 55 e When changing the MAIN mode s remote ID also change the SAT TU DTU iPod and NET USB remote ID at the same time 112 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Learning Function Z If your AV devices are of a brand other than DENON or if they cannot be operated with the preset memory function their remote control signals can be transfered to stored in the AVR 4810Cl s main remote control unit Press and hold in RC SETUP for at least 3 seconds The signal transmission indicator flashes twice Press 9 7 and 5 in that order The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the learning mode is set 3 Press DEVICE SELECTOR for the device you want to set Press the button to be set The main remote control unit s display turns off X If a button that cannot be learned is pressed the signal transmission indicator lights but the signal is not learned 5 Point the main remote control units directly at each other and press and hold the button on the other device s remote control unit that you want to learn Once learning is completed normally the display lights and the signal transmission indicator flashes twice 7 2
299. tlanta Starcom Supercable Torx United Cable US Electronics 00476 00276 00003 00276 00476 00003 00003 00008 00476 00003 00276 00476 00817 00003 00276 00476 01187 01376 00817 00008 00008 01068 00008 00237 00877 01060 01068 01877 00008 00008 00877 01877 00276 00003 00003 00008 00237 00477 00877 01877 00003 00276 00003 00003 00276 00003 00008 00276 IPTV HDTV Set Top Box G MI ABS ADB Alienware Amino AT amp T Cisco CyberPower Epson Gateway Hewlett Packard Howard Computers HP Hush iBUYPOWER Insignia KoolConnect LG Linksys Magnavox Media Center PC Microsoft Mind 01272 02254 02586 01272 01481 02482 00858 02345 01272 01563 01272 01272 01272 01272 01272 01272 01415 01481 01415 01272 01563 01272 01272 02049 01272 N N U Motorola Niveus Media Northgate Philco Ricavision Scientific Atlanta Sony Stack 9 SureWest Sylvania Systemax Tagar Systems Toshiba Touch Viewsonic Voodoo Xbox Zenith ZT Group 00858 01998 01272 01272 01563 01272 00858 02345 01272 01324 01272 01481 01563 01272 01272 01272 01272 01272 01329 01272 02049 01415 01272 DVD preset codes 30490 Codes pr r gl s DVD DENON Model No Mod le num ro DVD 555 DVD 556 DVD 557 DVD 558 DVD 755 DVD 756 DVD 757 DVD 758 DVD 900 DVD 910 DVD 955 DVD 1000 DVD 1200 DVD 1500 DVD 1710 DVD 1720 DVD
300. to less than 20 feet 6 0 meters LPF for LFE Set LFE signal playback range e 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz 120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz 42 Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu lt Channel Level Set the volume of the test tone to be the same when it is output from each speaker Test Tone Output test tone e Front L Front Height L Center Front Height R Front R Front Wide Surround R Surr Back R Surr Back L Surround L Front Wide L Subwoofer Select the speaker x When the Speaker Configuration Surround Back setting IS page 41 is set to 1spkr Surr Back is displayed e 12dB 12dB OdB Adjust the volume e Speakers set to None in the Speaker Configuration 187 page 41 settings are not displayed e When lt is pressed while the subwoofer volume is set to 12 dB the Subwoofer setting switches to OFF e When a headphones jack is inserted in the PHONES terminal of the AVR 4810CI the Channel Level is not displayed e You can also press CHANNEL LEVEL to set page 100 Adjust the Volume of the Different Speakers Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu Setting items Channel Level Continued Setting contents Default Reset all distance settings to factory default e Yes Reset to the defau
301. tting Return to previous menu 53 o gt 7 BST Te EST alae fom ETELE Setting items Setting contents GUI iPod Set the iPod screen display time when the input source is iPod Continued e Always Show display continuously e 30s Show display for 30 seconds after operation e 10s Show display for 10 seconds after operation e OFF Turn display off Tuner Set the tuner screen display time when the input source is TUNER XM SIRIUS or HD Radio e Always Show display continuously e 30s Show display for 30 seconds after operation e 10s Show display for 10 seconds after operation e OFF Turn display off Remote Preset Codes When preset codes are registered in the included main remote control Search a preset code to unit it can then be used to operate any devices you have such as DVD register in the remote control players or TVs made by different manufacturers unit In this menu you can search and display the preset codes that can be preset in the included main remote control unit Continued o e gt _1 Default settings for preset codes Q DVD Player DP DENON 32134 Video Cassette Recorder DVR Tivo 20739 Television SONY 10810 c Satellite Set Top Box SAT OBL DirecTV 01377 1 How to search for preset codes Operate with the main remote control unit switched to the MAIN mode I2 amp page 109 Operating the Mai
302. tting contents Subwoofer Level Set playback level of subwoofer signal input from the external input connector EXT IN e 15dB This is the recommended level e 10dB 5dB OdB Select the level according to the player being used Standby Source Set the HDMI connector for HDMI signal input during standby e Last Standby with last used input source during power on e 2 HDMI3 HDMIA HDMI5 HDMI6 The standby mode Is set at the input source assigned to the respective This can be set when Control is set to ON Control Monitor Set the HDMI MONITOR terminal to output the HDMI control signal e Monitor 1 Output from the MONITOR 1 terminal e Monitor 2 Output from the MONITOR 2 terminal This can be set when Control is set to ON Power Off Control The power of the AVR 4810CI and external device turn off together e ON Interlock e OFF Do not interlock This can be set when Control is set to ON 44 Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu 2ch Direct Stereo Make speaker settings for 2 channel mode playback Setting Select the method for setting the speakers used In the 2 channel direct and stereo playback modes e Basic The settings at Speaker Setup I page 41 are applied e Custom Make separate settings for 2 channel Front Set the front speaker size eLarge Use of a l
303. u enter the correct code the corresponding channel is locked 3 4 Press ENTER e Channels under Parental Lock cannot be tuned by performing Tuning Up Down or by category search e Channels stored in preset memory can be tuned in by the preset channel select operation even if Parental Lock is applied e When a channel to which Parental Lock is applied is being played Parental Lock for that channel is cancelled by performing step 2 e See Edit Lock Cord 87 65 for the method of changing Parental Lock Cord e You can also set Parental Lock I page 65 from the menu Tuning in Radio Stations HD Radio Technology Listening to HD Radio Technology 1 Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select IC page 31 2 Set the main remote control unit to the DTU mode 1257 page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit 3 Press BAND to select FM or AM 4 Tune in the desired broadcast station D To tune in automatically Auto Tuning Press MODE to select HD AUTO or AUTO then use TU A or TU V to select the station you want to hear e HD indicator lights on the display when an HD Radio station Is tuned in e When HD AUTO tuning mode is selected only HD Radio stations are tuned in e f AUTO tuning mode is selected both HD Radio and analog stations are tuned in 2 To tune in manually Manual Tuning Press
304. ugged in iPod dock was assigned and Video Symptom Cause Countermeasure No picture appears Picture cannot be recorded DVDs cannot be e This is not a malfunction Most movie software includes copy copied on a VCR prevention signals and cannot be copied GUI is not displayed Symptom HDMI audio signals are not output from speakers No picture appears with HDMI connections No sound is output from the monitor connected with HDMI connections When performing the following operations on a connected device AVR 4810CI has the same operations e Power ON OFF e Switching output devices e Adjust volume e Switch input source audio eCheck the connections of the AVR 4810Cl s video output terminals and the TV s input terminals e Make the proper input setting for the input terminals of the TV connected to the AVR 4810CI e Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode e High definition 1080i 720p and progressive 480p 576p video signals are not down converted Set the player to interlace 4801 5761 signals e Check the Video Select setting e he REC OUT video terminal does not have a video conversion function so use a video cable to input video signals an S Video cable to input S Video signals e Set Format according to the format NTSC or PAL of the TV being used Cause Countermeasure e Set HDMI Audio Out to AMP to output HDMI audio signals from the speakers e Check the connection of
305. und Speakers I Surround back speakers As seen from above Front height Point slightly Surround speaker downwards speaker Point slightly downwards ae MO a 5 to 90 Surround back speaker Front speaker As seen from the side X1 Recommendation for Dolby Pro Logic Iz X2 Recommendation for Audussey DSX Point slightly downwards Surround speakers C Surround back speaker As seen from the side As seen from above When no surround back speaker is being used Use the layout shown in the illustration below for the surround speaker Front speakers Center speaker 2250 Monitor 2 120 L1 rm Subwoofer Surround 2 to 3 feet 60 to 90 cm As seen from the side As seen from above 11 Installing the Speakers Installing the Speakers Example Installation of Speakers The AVR 4810CI supports a wide variation of surround playback such as in the example speaker installations E l shown below 11 1 9 1 7 1 6 1 5 1ch It is also possible to have speaker output in rooms other than the Speaker system Example of speaker installation Amp Assign setting E room MAIN ZONE where the surround is playing multi zone playback or to enjoy the high quality sound page 39 41 5 of the MAIN ZONE front speakers using bl wiring bi amping Set Amp Assign as appropriate for the
306. up do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume In event of a change perform Audyssey Auto Setup again 36 Main remote control unit Displaying the menu operation buttons Cancel the menu e f there is a disparity between the results and the connection status or if an error message is displayed check the error message against the errors listed in the Error Messages section I page 37 and perform Audyssey Auto Setup again e f the result still differs from the actual connection status after remeasurement or the error message still appears it is possible that the speakers are not connected properly Turn the AVR 4810CI off check the speaker connections and repeat the measurement process from the beginning Turn the AVR 4810CI off check the speaker connections and repeat the measurement process from the beginning e If you change a speaker position or orientation perform Audyssey Auto Setup again to obtain optimal equalizer correction f Moves the cursor Up Down Left Right Confirm the setting Return to previous menu Error Messages An error message is displayed if it was not possible to complete Audyssey Auto Setup due to speaker placement the measurement environment etc If this happens check the relevant items be sure to take the necessary measures then perform Audyssey Auto Setup over again Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections W
307. ure the IP address For details see page 49 Wired LAN settings in step 3 Wired LAN settings Use this procedure to configure the Wired LAN settings 1 Connect the LAN cable I 26 Connecting to a Home Network LAN 2 Turn on the AVR 4810CI rz amp page 28 Turning the Power On AVR 4810Cl performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function perform the setting step 3 3 Set the IP address at the Network Connecting NETWORK UB DHCP gt IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS Proxy e NETWORK CONNECTING DHCP ON IP Address 192 168 100 33 Exit 3 Detail 4 0 Enter Set IP address and proxy manually Cancel Set IP address manually Main remote control unit operation buttons RCH Displaying the menu Cancel the menu 2 Use lt D to set DHCP to OFF then press The DHCP function is disabled 3 Use AVP to input the address and press ENTER e IP Address Set the IP address within the ranges shown below The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set CLASS A 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 GLASS B 172 10 00 T72 2 1 255 255 CLASS C 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 e Subnet Mask When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter directly to the AVR 4810Cl input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by you
308. use a cable that is compatible with Deep Color e Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor s resolution In this case switch the Blu ray Disc Blu ray Disc player DVD player NN m VIDEO MITT AUDIO DVD ted s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is Connecting the Monitor ES Bese eae TES PENIS compatible O gt T d 7 OUT OUT OUT NOTE e Select the terminal to use and connect the device PR eFor video connections see Converting Input Video Signals for OOO the sound may be interrupted when the monitor s power is turned off For instructions on HDMI connections see Connecting Devices eThe audio signal from the HDMI output terminal sampling Equipped with HDMI Terminals on page 17 frequency number of channels etc may be limited by the HDMI audio specifications of the connected device regarding permissible Monit inputs on e Connecting to a Device Equipped with a DVI D pou se Fe A _ __ Terminal PR a qm When an HDMI DVI conversion cable sold separately is used OOO 09 P z APNA the HDMI video signals are converted to DVI signals allowing TERI connection to a device equipped with a DVI D terminal e No sound is output when connected to a device equipped with a DVI D terminal Also make the audio connections e Signals cannot be
309. ut signals are not output from the OPTICAL2 output connectors Also network audio signals Internet radio music server USB Napster and Rhapsody are output as copy protected signals e Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright holder e nput sources for which Delete is selected at Source Delete I page 53 cannot be selected Convenient Functions HDMI Control Function When you make an HDMI connection with a TV or player compatible with AVR 4810Cl and HDMI control functions you can perform the following operations by setting the HDMI control function of each device 1 AVR 4810Cl power off can be linked to the TV power off step When you set Output audio from amp in the TV audio output setup operation you can switch the amp power on 1 You can switch audio output devices with a TV operation 2 You can adjust AVR 4810CI volume in the TV volume adjustment operation 2 You can switch AVR 4810Cl input source through linkage to TV input switching When playing the player the AVR 4810Cl input function switches to the function of that player e When you want to listen to TV audio by AVR 4810CI connect optical digital or analog audio 857 page 21 IV e When using these functions set as follows HDMI Control Control I 44 set to e When Control is set to it consumes more
310. wner s manual Please select the types of connections suited for the equipment you are connecting After connections are completed certain settings must be made on the receiver Make the settings indicated for the individual items eDo not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed e When making connections also refer to the operating instructions of the other components e Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly left with left right with right e Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables Doing so can result in humming or noise Cables Used for Connections Select the cables sold separately according to the equipment being connected Audio video cables HDMI cable HDMI connections Audio cables Orange Mh 001 Coaxial digital cable Optical cable Coaxial digital connections Optical digital connections White O connections stereo surround 9 gt c Ky Audio cable Analog connections monaural for subwoofer J jP Audio cable Speaker connections ID Speaker cables Component video connections S Video connections Video connections DENON LINK connections Network connections wired LAN Video cables Green Blue Red Component video cable o o o mn S Video cable
311. y Press gt while the track you wish to register is playing Select Add to my library then press ENTER or gt The track is entered in the Library d Listening to Tracks Registered In My Napster Library Use A V to select My Napster Library then press ENTER or Use A V to select the information or track then press ENTER After selecting the information is displayed 1 To stop iz page 85 L Selecting tracks iz page 85 J Playing repeatedly iz page 86 2 Playing in random order iz page 86 L Searching pages iz page 86 e Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound The default setting is Mode 3 I page 94 e he time default 30 sec for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI NET USB 187 page 53 e Use STATUS to switch between displaying the title name artist name or album name Playback preparation D Check the network environment then turn on the AVR 4810Cl s power I 26 Connecting to a Home Network LAN 2 If settings are required make the Network Connecting IS page 46 Press SOURCE SELECT to display the GUI Source Select menu then select I page 31 Switching the main remote control unit to the NET USB mode page 108 Operating the Main Remote Control Unit Use A V to select Sign in to your account then pr
312. y and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio TV technician for help IC Information For Canadian customers PRODUCT This product contains 4491A NM100BB This product complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this product may not cause harmful interference and 2 this product must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 APPAREIL Cet appareil contiens 4491A NM100BB Cet appareil est conforme la norme CNR 210 du Canada L utilisation de ce dispositif est autoris e seulement aux deux conditions suivantes 1 il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et
313. y form on the operating parts inside the unit causing the unit not to operate properly If this happens let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature before using the unit Cautions on using mobile phones Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise If so move the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use Moving the unit Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power outlet Next disconnect the connection cables to other system units before moving the unit e Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ from the actual unit for explanation purposes Cautions installation Note For proper heat dispersal do not install this unit in a confined space such as a bookcase or similar enclosure Thank you for purchasing this DENON product To ensure proper operation please read this owner s manual carefully before using the product After reading them be sure to keep them for future reference Accessories Check that the following parts are supplied with the product 1 Owner s manual 2 Getting started 3 Warranty for North America model only 4 Service station list 5 Power Cord length Approx 6 2 ft 1 9 m 6 Main remote control unit RC 1126 7 LR6 AA batteries for RC 1126 Sub remote control unit RC 1121 9

to select - Studio 22

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents